Pioneer Flat Panel Television PRO 111FD User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Congratulations on your purchase of a Pioneer KURO flat panel television.  
KURO is the future of Pioneer flat-panel displays. It’s a world without boundaries. A place where the senses evolve, colors  
are felt and sounds can be tasted. An experience that changes not only the way you look at television, but the way you  
look at the world.  
3.3.3 Turn On the Sleep Timer........................................................................................................................................ 44  
3.4 Adjust the Picture and Sound Quality .......................................................................................................................... 45  
3.4.1 Adjust the Picture for Your Room Lighting.......................................................................................................... 45  
3.4.2 General Picture (Video) Adjustment for an AV Source ....................................................................................... 46  
3.4.3 Compare Images When Adjusting the Picture.................................................................................................... 47  
3.4.4 Display a Graphical Picture/Sound Adjustment Screen..................................................................................... 48  
3.4.5 Sound Control......................................................................................................................................................... 49  
3.4.6 General Sound (Audio) Adjustment...................................................................................................................... 49  
3.5 Block Programs, Channels, or Content ........................................................................................................................ 50  
3.5.1 Assign a Parental Control (Block) Password....................................................................................................... 50  
3
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2.1 Specify the HDMI Input Type.................................................................................................................................84  
5.2.2 Specify a Digital HDMI Signal Type ......................................................................................................................85  
5.2.3 Specify an Audio HDMI Signal Type .....................................................................................................................85  
5.3 Control Equipment with the Panel’s Remote Through HDMI.....................................................................................86  
5.3.1 Control an AV System.............................................................................................................................................88  
5.3.2 Control a Recorder .................................................................................................................................................89  
5.3.3 Control a Player.......................................................................................................................................................89  
5.3.4 Add an AV Amp or a BD Player.............................................................................................................................90  
5.4 Specific HDMI Control Commands ...............................................................................................................................91  
5.4.1 Play Source Sound Using an HDMI Command...................................................................................................91  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.2.6 VCR (Brands W - Z) .............................................................................................................................................. 141  
8.2.7 PVR........................................................................................................................................................................ 142  
8.2.8 BD (HD-DVD)........................................................................................................................................................ 142  
8.2.9 DVD-R.................................................................................................................................................................... 142  
8.2.10 DVD (Brands A - N) ............................................................................................................................................ 143  
8.2.11 DVD (Brands O - Z)............................................................................................................................................. 144  
8.2.12 LD......................................................................................................................................................................... 144  
8.3 Specifications................................................................................................................................................................ 145  
8.4 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................................................... 162  
8.5 Index............................................................................................................................................................................... 164  
8.6 Trademarks, Licenses, & Patent Information ............................................................................................................. 165  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs  
01  
1 Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel  
TVs  
The Pioneer ELITE Series Flat Panel TV models include the 60-inch PRO-151FD and the 50-inch PRO-111FD  
(screen sizes measured diagonally). Below is a list of all accessories shipped with your panel. If an item is  
missing, please contact your dealer or our Service organization immediately. Service contact information is listed  
on the back of this manual.  
1.1 Flat Panel TV Shipment Checklist  
In addition to the flat panel TV, there are several accessories included to make installation quick and easy. Please  
check for contents before discarding or allowing your installer to discard any packing material.  
The PRO-151FD and PRO-111FD shipments have slightly different pieces. Identify the accessories from the  
appropriate list below.  
You will need a Philips screwdriver when mounting the speaker and attaching the stand.  
Shipped with both models  
Remote Control  
Batteries for Remote (2)  
Cable Clamps (4)  
Cleaning Cloth  
Power Cord (2 m/6.6 feet)  
Operating Instructions  
Warranty Card  
Color Sensor  
Screws (x 2) (M5 x 8 mm)  
Color Sensor Bracket (when attached to the top right of the rear panel)  
Bracket (for 60”)  
Bracket (for 50”)  
Also shipped with the PRO-151FD (60” panel)  
Stand kit  
Base Cover  
Stand Pipes (2)  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs  
01  
Also shipped with the PRO-151FD (60” panel)  
Falling Prevention Metal Fittings (2)  
Silver Screws (4) (4×10 mm)  
Black Screws (4) (M6×20 mm)  
Light-Blocking Shield  
Screws to Metal Fittings (4) (M4×35 mm)  
Speaker accessories  
Speaker Brackets  
for TOP-Right  
Speaker Cables (2)  
for BOTTOM-Right  
for TOP-Left  
Speaker Mounting Screws (16) (M5×10 mm)  
Speaker  
for BOTTOM-Left  
Also shipped with the PRO-111FD (50” panel)  
Stand kit  
Falling Prevention Metal Fittings (2)  
Screws to Metal Fittings(2) (M4×35 mm)  
Speaker accessories  
Speaker Cables (2)  
Speaker Brackets  
for TOP-Right  
Speaker  
for BOTTOM-Right  
for TOP-Left  
Speaker Mounting Screws (16)  
(M5×10 mm)  
for BOTTOM-Left  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs  
1.2 Control Options: Get to Know Your Flat Panel TV  
01  
You can operate your flat panel TV from the panel buttons or with the remote control. The following sections  
provide button locations/operations for the panel and the remote control.  
1.2.1 Control Buttons and More on the Flat Panel TV  
Your flat panel TV has buttons, indicators, and sensors on the lower front bezel with more buttons, toggles, and  
ports on the panel sides. Refer to the drawings below for specific locations and functions. Or, for the back ports  
and terminals only, check the terminal position sheet located near the panel’s terminal compartment to identify  
the various options.  
ELITE Series Models: Face of Panel  
6
(PRO-111FD)  
(PRO-151FD)  
1 2 3  
1
2 3  
4
5
7
1 - Power ON indicator  
2 - STANDBY indicator  
3 - SLEEP indicator  
4 -Room Light sensor  
5 -Remote Control sensor  
6 -Color Sensor  
7 -Bezel (some call it the front frame)  
Command Side of the Panel (left side)  
8 -USB terminal  
9 -INPUT 7 terminal (HDMI)  
10 -PHONES terminal  
11 -INPUT 3 terminal (Video)  
12 -INPUT 3 terminals (Audio)  
13 -STANDBY/ON button  
14 -INPUT button  
13  
8
14  
15 -VOLUME Up/Down buttons  
16 -CHANNEL Up/Down buttons  
9
15  
16  
10  
11  
12  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs  
01  
Back of the Panel  
1 - ANT terminal  
2 - PC Input terminal (Analog RGB)  
3 - Color sensor terminal  
4 - AC In terminal  
(upper bank)  
1
2
3
4
5
12 13 14 151617181920212223  
(middle bank)  
6
7
8
9 10  
11  
24  
5 - Ethernet cable port  
15 -INPUT 1 terminal (Video)  
16 -INPUT 1 terminals (Audio)  
17 -INPUT 2 terminal (Video)  
18 -INPUT 2 terminals (Audio)  
6 - INPUT 4 terminal (HDMI)  
7 - INPUT 5 terminal (HDMI)  
8 - INPUT 6 terminal (HDMI)  
9 - RC-232C terminal (for factory use)  
10 - INPUT 4 terminals (Audio)  
11 -INPUT 5 terminals (Audio)  
12 -SUB WOOFER OUT terminal  
13 -AUDIO OUT terminals (Audio)  
14 -INPUT 1 terminal (S-Video)  
19 -INPUT 2 terminals (Component, Y, P , P )  
B
R
20 -IR REPEATER OUT terminal  
21 -PC INPUT terminal (Audio)  
22 -CONTROL OUT terminal  
23 -DIGITAL OUT terminal (Optical)  
24 -SPEAKERS (right/left) terminal  
(PRO-151FD)  
(lower bank)  
25 26  
27 28  
25 -Speakers (R) terminal (speaker side)  
26 -Color Sensor  
27 -Power On button  
28 -Speakers (L) terminal (speaker side)  
Terminals on side and rear panels are common to both ELITE models.  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs  
01  
1.2.2 Operating the Remote Control  
The remote control for the ELITE Series panels is a powerful tool. This section provides a brief introduction to your  
remote control while later sections explore more advanced operations.  
Insert the Batteries into the Remote Control  
To open push and slide the battery cover in the direction of the arrows.  
Load the supplied two AA size batteries by the negative polarity (–) ends first.  
The batteries supplied with this product may have a shorter life expectancy due to storage conditions. If the  
remote control seems to be failing or is weak, replace the provided batteries with new alkaline batteries.  
Never mix old and new batteries. Mixing old and new batteries can shorten the life of new batteries or cause  
chemical leaks in old batteries. Also, mixing different types or brands of batteries can cause issues as batteries  
brands have slightly different characteristics.  
Note: If the flat panel TV’s remote control is not needed for an extended length of time, remove the batteries.  
When disposing of used batteries, please comply with  
governmental regulations or environmental public institution’s  
Remote Control Issues  
There are several issues that can affect your remote control but the most common problem is weak batteries.  
Weak batteries in the remote control can cause communication to fail or only operate sporadically. In this  
situation, try moving closer to the panel and attempt to control the panel with the remote. If the panel responds  
then change the batteries. If moving closer has no effect on the panel, check the surroundings for objects that  
might be blocking the signal. Also consider other equipment with remote controls that are in the area around the  
panel. Objects and other IR signals can disrupt the remote. For more help with your remote control, refer to “6.1  
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs).”  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs  
01  
Operating Range for the Remote Control  
To control the flat panel TV, point the remote towards the sensor on the panel’s bottom right corner. For easy  
operation, keep the distance between the remote control and the sensor less than 7 m (23 feet) and at an angle  
of less than 30 degrees.  
7 m  
(23 feet)  
30º  
30º  
Sensor  
The remote control may not work properly if the sensor is in direct sunlight or very bright lighting. If your viewing  
room is naturally bright, change the position of the panel or physically use the remote control closer to the panel’s  
sensor.  
Note: If the remote control is left sitting in direct sunlight or under a very strong light, the case could warp or  
deform.  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs  
01  
1.2.3 Buttons on the Remote Control  
Except for a few options, commands available through the buttons on the flat panel TV are duplicated on the  
remote control. The remote control can be programmed to control other equipment such as a DVD Player,  
Surround Sound system, etc. A later section entitled “5 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV” explains  
how to use the remote to control other equipment.  
This section identifies and describes the buttons on the remote control.  
Remote: Left side buttons (top to bottom, left to right)  
TV :  
1
2
3
4
TV  
Turn On or place panel in Standby  
1
INPUT:  
INPUT  
1
2
6
3
7
4
Select a source (INPUT 1 thru INPUT 7)  
TV/DTV  
2
PC:  
5
AV  
SCREEN  
SIZE  
Select the PC terminal as an input source  
DISPLAY  
SELECTION  
PC  
3 4  
AV SELECTION:  
Select audio/video settings  
AV Source: OPTIMUM, PERFORMANCE, MOVIE,  
PURE, GAME, SPORT, Standard  
FREEZE  
SPLIT  
SWAP  
SHIFT  
5 6  
1
4
7
2
5
3
6
PC Source: STANDARD, USER  
7
SPLIT:  
Cycle view thru single-screen, 2-screen,  
picture-in-picture  
5
6
8
9
CH  
0
ENTER  
8
FREEZE:  
Freeze a frame from a moving image then  
press again to cancel the freeze function  
CH RETURN  
VOL  
9
CH  
MUTING  
Number buttons 0 thru 9:  
7
8
9
Select a channel  
EXIT  
TOOLS  
10SAT GUIDE  
•(dot):  
Enter a dot for selecting a sub-channel  
DVD  
TOP MENU  
11  
VOL +/–:  
ENTER  
Set the volume  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
EXIT: 10  
Exit the menu to return to the normal screen  
12  
SAT / DVD MENU  
Arrow buttons: 11  
Navigate the menu screens  
13  
HDMI  
CTRL  
14  
HOME MENU: 12  
Display the HOME MENU  
SOURCE  
STOP  
REC  
HMG  
RECEIVER  
VOL  
Color buttons (Red, Green, Blue, Yellow): 13  
INPUT  
Control a BD player for HDMI Control functions only  
SELECT  
EDIT/LEARN  
TV CBL  
DVD  
15  
HDMI CONTROL: 14  
Select the HDMI Control functions  
RCV SAT VCR DVR  
SELECT: 15  
Select for TV/RCV, CBL/SAT, VCR, or DVD/DVR  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
Introduction to the ELITE Series Flat Panel TVs  
01  
Remote: Right side buttons (top to bottom, left to right)  
16  
: Lights up all buttons  
TV  
Lights turn off if no operations are performed within five  
seconds. This is used for remote control use in dark locations.  
16  
INPUT  
17 TV/DTV:  
Select analog or digital TV channels  
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
TV/DTV  
17  
SCREEN  
SIZE  
AV  
18 DISPLAY:  
Display the channel information  
DISPLAY  
SELECTION  
PC  
SPLIT  
18 19  
FREEZE  
19 SCREEN SIZE:  
Select the screen size  
SWAP  
SHIFT  
20 21  
1
2
3
20 SWAP:  
Switch between the two screens when  
viewing as 2-screen or picture-in-picture  
4
7
5
8
0
6
9
21 SHIFT:  
CH  
Move the location of the small screen when  
viewing as picture-in-picture  
ENTER  
22  
CH RETURN  
22 CH ENTER:  
Change the channel  
23  
VOL  
CH  
25  
MUTING  
24  
23 CH RETURN:  
Return to the previous channel  
EXIT  
TOOLS  
SAT GUIDE  
24 MUTING:  
Turn off the sound while the video continues to play  
26  
DVD  
TOP MENU  
25 CH +/–:  
Cycle through channels  
ENTER  
27  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
26 TOOLS:  
28  
Display the TOOLS Menu - refer to “3.6 Smart Starts for New  
Owners”  
SAT / DVD MENU  
HDMI  
CTRL  
27 ENTER:  
Execute a command  
2S9TOP  
SOURCE  
REC  
HMG  
28 RETURN:  
30  
RECEIVER  
VOL  
Return to the previous menu screen  
INPUT  
EDIT/LEARN  
SELECT  
29 Player/Recorder Control:  
TV CBL  
DVD  
Use buttons for control of connected equipment  
RCV SAT VCR DVR  
30 HMG (Home Media Gallery):  
Display the Home Media Gallery menu  
Use this button to start recording (for VCR/DVD recorder only)  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
2 Install Your Flat Panel TV  
There are several installation options for your flat panel TV. This chapter walks you through how to choose an  
installation site, the best mounting methods, and how to install your panel.  
2.1 Choose a Location and the Mounting Method  
Your flat panel TV is very thin. The panel needs a solid surface and some sort of support structure (a stand, table,  
etc.) to protect it from being tipped over or knocked down. Use installation accessories and parts included with  
the shipment. Pioneer recommends working with a qualified installer whenever possible.  
Regardless of the mounting method, anchor or secure your flat panel TV using a combination of the mounting  
holes and/or supplied bolts.  
Side view  
Rear view (PRO-151FD)  
Mounting surface  
Mounting  
bracket (or  
equivalent item)  
Mounting hole  
Mounting hole  
M8 screw  
12 mm to 18 mm  
(0.5 inches to  
0.7 inches)  
Rear view (PRO-111FD)  
W
W
Mounting hole  
Mounting hole  
W
W
T
T
W
W
Note: Some installation options require a different type of bolt. Check with your installer or dealer to purchase the  
appropriate bolt(s).  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
2.1.1 Check the Location for Suitability  
When choosing the location for your panel, there are several factors you need to keep in mind. The installation  
site should be out of direct sunlight and have sufficient ventilation around the flat panel TV to allow cooling. The  
diagram below is an example of a stand-mounted panel with proper ventilation.  
Over 50 cm  
(19 11/16 inches)  
Over  
10 cm  
(3 15/16  
inches)  
The distance behind and above the panel  
changes depending on your choice of mount.  
Consult with your dealer or professional  
installer for proper ventilation.  
Use the checklist below to judge possible installation sites.  
No danger of power overloads  
Safe from excessive vibrations  
Away from air conditioners  
Free of moisture or dampness  
No danger of splashing water  
Route cords and cables safely  
Separate from other IR equipment  
Protected from hits or shocks  
Distance from heat sources  
Out of direct sunlight  
Away from strong lighting sources  
For specific cautions and safety information, refer to “7.2 Physical Location & Temperature Considerations” and  
“7.7 Safety Precautions.”  
2.1.2 Lift and/or Move Your Panel (the How To’s)  
This flat panel TV is built for endurance but because of the technology, the panel must be handled with care. Use  
the handles attached to the rear of the flat panel TV to lift the unit. To avoid flexing or twisting the unit, you need  
at least two people to lift and move the panel. Do not move the flat panel TV by holding only a single handle or by  
dragging the panel by its handles.  
Use the handles to move the panel.  
Do not move the panel by holding the  
color sensor, speaker or speaker  
brackets.  
Note: Do not use the handles to hang the flat panel TV or as anchors to prevent the panel from slipping or tipping  
after it is mounted.  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
2.2 Install the Panel Using a Stand  
2.2.1 Use or Remove the Included Stand  
The PRO-111FD ships with the Pioneer table top stand (stand) attached. Attach the included stand to the panel for  
the PRO-151FD. For PRO-111FD, attach the falling prevention metal fittings after placing the panel to stand upright.  
(PRO-111FD)  
Installation screws  
(M4 × 35 mm: black)  
Falling prevention  
metal fitting  
Attach the Stand to the Panel  
Do not handle the flat panel TV on a wagon or pallet that is  
smaller than its stand. The stand will bend.  
1 ) Detach the speaker if it has already been added.  
Refer to “Attach/Detach the Speaker” on page 19 for assistance.  
2 ) Lay the flat panel TV down on a raised surface with the stand base hanging over the edge.  
3 ) Place all stand parts on a soft cloth to avoid scratching.  
If you are mounting the PRO-151FD continue with Steps 4 and 5. If you are mounting the PRO-111FD skip  
to Step 7.  
4 ) Turn the base cover over so that the bottom is facing up.  
5 ) Insert the stand supports (legs) into the base cover.  
Please carefully install the supports (left and right) so that they are in the correct positions. Misaligned supports  
can damage the base and/or the supports.  
6 ) Tighten the base screws to lock the supports in to place.  
Screws  
(4 x 10 mm: silver)  
Screws  
(4 x 10 mm: silver)  
Rear  
Front  
Completed  
stand  
Base cover  
Sheet  
Note: Assemble the stand with a soft sheet placed under the base cover. If a sheet is not laid before assembly,  
the front surface of the base cover may be scratched.  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
7 ) After assembling the stand, attach the falling prevention metal fittings using the installation screws.  
(PRO-151FD)  
Installation screws  
(M4 x 35 mm: black)  
Falling prevention  
metal fitting  
8 ) With the flat panel TV still face down, insert the stand’s supports into the bottom of the panel then tighten  
the screws.  
Line up the column supports with  
the bottom of the flat panel TV.  
Installation bolts  
(M6 x 20 mm)  
Installation bolts  
(M6 x 20 mm)  
Insert the stand supports into the flat panel  
TV so that the arrow marked “FRONT/FACE  
AVANT” on the bottom of the stand  
points down.  
9 ) With the assistance of at least one other person, lift the panel upright then move it in to position.  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
Attach the Light-Blocking Shield  
Conduct after attaching the flat panel TV onto the stand.  
Light-blocking shield  
Front  
Base cover  
Rear  
Note: Attach the light-blocking shield after anchoring the base cover on a flat stable place.  
Peel off one side of the double-stick tape on the light-blocking shield and attach the shield onto the base cover.  
Front  
Rear  
Note: Be careful that the light-blocking shield does not catch on the pipe insertion holes. Anchor the light-  
blocking shield so that there are no gaps. If there is a gap, the light-blocking shield may peel off.  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
Attach/Detach the Speaker  
The flat panel TV’s speaker delivers high-quality, clear sound. Although other devices can be added or removed  
from the mounted panel, physically attach the speaker last. Disconnect the cables from the Speaker and  
REMOVE THE SPEAKER before mounting or moving the panel.  
Before attaching the speaker to your mounted panel, review the information below.  
• Lay the panel face down on a stable surface when attaching speaker brackets.  
• Use only the supplied screws and tighten securely before stepping away.  
• Handle the speaker carefully to protect the cabinet and grille net from scratches and other damage.  
• Placing a CRT monitor near the speaker can cause a blur on the flat panel TV. Keep the distance between the  
speaker and the monitor.  
• Connecting these speakers to another panel or device can  
damage the unit or cause a fire.  
• When using tone control to increase treble, avoid over-  
amplifying the volume.  
Note: Use the foam packing materials to protect the equipment from scratches or other damage during  
mounting.  
Stand-Mounted Panel  
1 ) Attach the appropriate speaker brackets (left and right) to the top and bottom on the back of the speakers  
using the supplied screws.  
Screw holes  
(PRO-151FD)  
Speaker bracket (For TOP-Right)  
Speaker bracket  
(For TOP-Right)  
Speaker bracket  
(For BOTTOM-Right)  
Screw holes  
Speaker bracket  
(For BOTTOM-Right)  
Place the speaker so its  
terminals (bottom) are  
facing you.  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
(PRO-111FD)  
Screw holes  
Speaker bracket (For TOP-Right)  
Speaker bracket  
(For TOP-Right)  
Speaker bracket  
(For BOTTOM-Right)  
Screw holes  
Speaker bracket  
(For BOTTOM-Right)  
Place the speaker so its  
terminals (bottom) are  
facing you.  
2 ) Screw a supplied screw into the speaker bracket hole (lower of the two) at the top, rear of the panel.  
Do not tighten it all the way yet. Leave it loose, with about 5 mm left to tighten.  
Speaker  
mounting  
hole  
Top, rear of  
flat panel TV  
Top of flat panel TV  
5 mm  
Leave a space of about 5 mm  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
3 ) Hang the speaker bracket on the screw at the top by passing the wide part over it and lowering into the slot;  
screw in the lower screw temporarily.  
After passing the wide part of the hole of the speaker bracket (top) over the screw, lower the speaker onto it.  
(PRO-111FD)  
(PRO-151FD)  
After passing the  
wide part of the  
hole over the screw,  
lower the speaker.  
After passing the  
wide part of the  
hole over the screw,  
lower the speaker.  
Tighten with the provided  
screw the bottom speaker  
bracket to the flat panel  
TV temporarily (one place  
bottom).  
Tighten with the provided  
screw the bottom speaker  
bracket to the flat panel  
TV temporarily (one place  
bottom).  
4 ) Adjust the position of the speaker then tighten the upper and lower screws firmly.  
5 ) Tighten the two screws at the top and bottom for each speaker.  
(PRO-111FD)  
(PRO-151FD)  
6 ) Pass the supplied speaker cable between the speaker and the panel (below the speaker bracket) from below.  
7 ) Connect the speaker cables to the speaker.  
Refer to “ 2.2.2 Connect the Speaker Cables.”  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
8 ) Insert the cable in the groove on the speaker.  
(PRO-151FD)  
(PRO-111FD)  
Speaker cable  
Speaker  
terminal  
Speaker cable  
Speaker terminal  
Insertion  
in groove  
Insertion  
in groove  
9 ) Connect the other end of the speaker cables to the rear of the panel.  
Refer to “ 2.2.2 Connect the Speaker Cables.”  
Note: If the speaker needs to be repositioned (horizontally or vertically) after it is attached, loosen the speaker  
mounting screws first. Adjust the position then retighten the screws.  
2.2.2 Connect the Speaker Cables  
1 ) Press down on the tab.  
2 ) Insert the appropriately colored wire into the opening.  
tab  
3 ) Allow a small percentage of the cable’s bare wire to remain visible.  
4 ) Release the tab to clamp the wire.  
If the bare wire is hidden when the tab is released, repeat Steps 1  
through 4 until the proper amount of cable is showing.  
5 ) Repeat this process for each cable, matching the color of the wire to the  
appropriate terminal.  
6 ) Connect the speaker cables to the speaker.  
7 ) Bundle the speaker cables, power cord and other cables in the cable  
clamp then insert the clamp into an appropriate hole on the rear of the  
flat panel TV.  
Refer to “2.7 Route then Bundle the Power Cord and Cables.”  
Use the clamps as necessary (see page 33).  
Black  
Black  
Gray  
Red  
Gray  
Speaker terminal  
Red  
(PRO-151FD)  
Speaker cable  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
PRO-151FD with the speaker installed  
Gray  
Black  
Black  
Red  
Cable clamp  
Cable clamp  
Speaker cable  
(PRO-111FD)  
• Before connecting the speakers to the flat panel TV, unplug  
the panel from the power outlet. Connecting the speaker  
cable with the power cord plugged in can cause  
malfunction or damage to the panel if the cable’s bare wire  
touches other equipment. Plug in the power cord after  
connecting the speakers.  
• Do not leave speaker cable wires bare and exposed at the  
terminals. Exposed wires can result in an electrical short  
causing malfunction or damage to the system.  
• Do not connect any devices to the speaker terminals other  
than the speakers specified.  
2.3 Wall/Ceiling Mounting  
Lay the 50” panel down on a raised surface then remove the stand.  
Installation bolts (1)  
Installation bolts (2)  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
A common flat panel TV mounting option is to hang the panel on a sturdy wall or from a reinforced ceiling. When  
mounting in this way, some preparations must be completed first. Follow the steps below to prepare the panel for  
mounting.  
1 ) Attach the speaker brackets to the speaker (see page 19).  
2 ) Attach the speaker to the panel (see page 21).  
(PRO-111FD)  
3 ) Connect the speaker cables to the speakers then to the panel (see page 22).  
4 ) Connect cables for any other devices to the panel.  
When deciding on a location for your flat panel TV, consider other equipment in the room. Equipment such  
as a DVR, Receiver, VCR, etc. requires some way to communicate with the panel, either directly or through  
another device. Review the instructions that came with the other equipment for available ports and  
terminals.  
After deciding which ports and terminals are needed, mark the connections on the flat panel TV for easier  
identification once the panel is mounted.  
5 ) Temporarily bundle loose cables with rubber bands (not included).  
6 ) Plug the flat panel TV’s power cord in to the panel but do NOT plug in to the power outlet.  
7 ) Follow installation directions provided with your selected wall/ceiling mount.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the wall/ceiling mount unit.  
2.4 Mount the Flat Panel TV  
Because your flat panel TV is slim but heavy, have at least two people mount and/or position the panel. The  
following sections provide instructions for the different mounting and anchoring options.  
Anchor the Panel When Using a Stand  
When using a stand, stabilize the panel to keep it from tipping over. Please use the supplied metal fittings and  
screws to anchor the panel to a wall or other solid support structure.  
Another option is to purchase hooks, cords, and fittings through your installer or from your local hardware store.  
The hardware size and strength depends on the composition and thickness of the anchoring surface.  
Recommended hook: Nominal diameter 8 mm (3/8 inch), length 12 mm to 18 mm (0.5 inches to 0.7 inches)  
To anchor the panel when using the provided stand, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Attach the hooks to the mounting holes on the  
back of the panel.  
2 ) Sink the fittings into the wall or support structure.  
12 mm to 18 mm  
(0.5 inches to 0.7 inches)  
3 ) Run cords between the hooks and the fittings.  
1. Hook  
4 ) Tighten the cords until the panel is anchored but  
not pulled off balance.  
2. Cord  
Fitting  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
To stabilize the flat panel TV on a table or platform, use the supplied metal fittings and screws as well as  
commercially available wood screws. The wood screws are to anchor the metal fittings when mounting on a  
wooden surface. These screws should have a nominal diameter of 4 mm (5/32 inch) and are at least 20 mm (13/  
16 inch) long.  
Notes: Avoid moving the table after the panel is attached.  
Do not use bare wires for the cord. If any part of the wire is introduced into the ventilation port on the back  
of the display panel, fire or electrical shock could result.  
Follow the steps below to secure your flat panel TV.  
1 ) Mark locations for metal fittings and screws on the back edge of the table using the panel stand to determine  
placement.  
(PRO-111FD)  
(PRO-151FD)  
20 mm  
(13/16 inch)  
min.  
Wood screw  
(commercially  
available,  
4 mm x 20 mm  
(5/32 inch x 13/  
16 inch) min.)  
Wood screw  
(commercially  
available, 4 mm x  
20 mm (5/32 inch x  
13/16 inch) min.)  
2 ) Drill holes in the table or platform edge at the marked locations.  
3 ) Lift panel into place with the assistance with at least one other person.  
4 ) Use wood screws (not included) to secure the metal fittings to the table.  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
2.5 Attach the Color Sensor  
02  
When attached to your panel, the color sensor analyses the brightness of the environment to automatically  
optimize the picture quality according to the viewing condition. To activate this function, select OPTIMUM on the  
AV Selection menu, Mode 1 or Mode 2 on the Room Light Sensor menu (refer to “3.4.1 Adjust the Picture for Your  
Room Lighting.”  
We strongly suggest you attach the color sensor to the bottom right of the front panel. It can be attached to the rear  
of the panel, but the color sensor may not operate properly depending on the conditions (refer to the Important  
bullets on page 28). For the actual procedure, follow the directions below.  
Note: Do not connect any other external device, such as a keyboard to the color sensor terminal.  
Do not connect the color sensor cable to a PC.  
To clean the sensor window, gently wipe with the supplied cleaning cloth.  
Do not use extension cables for the color sensor.  
Do not disassemble or modify the color sensor.  
Attach the Color Sensor to the Front Panel (recommended)  
This is a simple and easy-to-attach method using a magnet.  
1 ) Attach the color sensor at the bottom right of the front panel using a magnet.  
Flat panel TV  
Magnet  
Color  
sensor  
(Front)  
(Rear)  
2 ) Attach the color sensor along the bottom edge of the front panel flush with the right side.  
3 ) Connect the cable to the color sensor terminal on the rear upper bank but do NOT plug in to the power outlet.  
Color sensor terminal  
(upper bank)  
Color sensor cable  
Color sensor  
Cable clamp  
Note: Use the cable clamps as necessary.  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
Attach the Color Sensor to the Rear Panel  
Methods of attaching the color sensor to the rear panel differ depending on the panel with or without side-  
mounted speakers.  
(when side-mounted speakers are installed)  
1 ) Remove the screws of the color sensor then replace the bracket.  
Use the removed screws again.  
(Bracket for PRO-151FD)  
2 ) Loosen the upper two (2) speaker bracket screws.  
3 ) Fit the color sensor bracket’s lower grooves into the screws.  
Adjust the color sensor/speaker bracket positions so as to stay in place.  
The bracket is for PRO-151FD panel but the procedure is the same for PRO-111FD.  
4 ) Fasten the screws.  
5 ) Connect the cable to the color sensor terminal on the rear upper bank but do NOT plug in to the power outlet.  
Color sensor  
Color sensor terminal  
(upper bank)  
Speaker cable  
Color sensor cable  
Cable clamp  
Cable clamp  
Notes: Do not loosen the screws at the bottom of the panel. When attached to the rear panel, the sensor window  
points upward.  
If the color sensor attached to the rear panel does not operate properly, attach it to the front panel.  
Do not use the supplied screws when attaching the color sensor using the speaker brackets.  
The color sensor may become hot due to a heat emitted from the panel. When using it in a high-  
temperature environment, attach the color sensor to the bottom of the front panel.  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
(when side-mounted speakers are not installed)  
1 ) Remove the screws of the color sensor then replace the bracket.  
Use the removed screws again.  
2 ) Finger tighten the supplied color sensor screws in the speaker screw holes.  
3 ) Fit the color sensor bracket’s lower grooves into the screws.  
Adjust the bracket position to stay in place.  
The bracket is for PRO-151FD panel but the procedure is the same for PRO-111FD.  
4 ) Fasten the screws.  
5 ) Connect the cable to the color sensor terminal on the rear upper bank but do NOT plug in to the power outlet.  
Important  
The color sensor may not operate properly:  
• if attached by methods other than specified above  
• if anything blocks light falling on the sensor window  
• if light falls on only part of the sensor window  
• if the light falling on the sensor window and the panel screen differs  
Notes: If the color sensor attached to the rear panel does not operate properly, attach it to the front panel.  
The color sensor may become hot due to a heat emitted from the panel. When using it in a high-  
temperature environment, attach the color sensor to the bottom of the front panel.  
Do not use the screws supplied for the speakers.  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
2.6 Connect to Broadcast TV & Other Devices (DVR, Receiver, BDR, etc.)  
The type of equipment attached to your flat panel TV determines which panel ports are used. The following  
sections explain how to connect broadcast TV and playback equipment such as a DVD player, Surround Sound  
system, video recorder, etc. to the panel. If your equipment is not listed, please refer to the operating instructions  
that came with the device(s) for connection assistance.  
2.6.1 Add Analog (conventional) and Digital TV Channels  
Whether a TV station broadcasts in Analog or Digital, your flat panel TV shows the programs as long as the panel  
is programmed to accept the signal. To program your panel for broadcast TV, select terminal ANT.  
T
T
W
W
The ANT terminal accepts both analog and digital  
broadcasts. Connect a VHF/UHF antenna and/or cable TV  
to the panel’s rear ANT terminal, then press TV/DTV on  
the remote control to toggle between analog and digital  
broadcasts. When watching analog TV channels, you can  
also use an outdoor antenna for the clearest analog  
picture.  
Rear view  
If your outdoor antenna uses a 75-ohm coaxial cable with  
an F-type connector, plug it into the panel’s antenna  
terminal on the back.  
In order to watch both analog and  
digital broadcasts through your  
terrestrial antenna or cable  
connection, you must first connect  
the antenna cable to a splitter.  
2.6.2 Connect Your Other Pioneer Equipment  
This section provides cabling information for your other  
Pioneer equipment when combined with the panel. Each diagram can also be used as a reference tool for non-Pioneer  
devices but port locations may differ or be unavailable.  
Connect cable or Satellite using STB (Set Top Box):  
T
T
W
W
Satellite antenna  
Rear view  
SAT IN  
Cable STB/Satellite STB  
Cable STB/Satellite STB  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUTPUT  
COMPONENT  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
OUT  
VIDEO OUTPUT  
OUT  
Y
Y
IN  
HDMI OUT  
IN  
HDMI OUT  
PB  
PR  
PB  
OUT  
OUT  
PR  
When using a cable STB or Satellite STB, plug in to the antenna/cable TV wall outlet using the STB cable provided  
with your STB. If your STB has an HDMI terminal, use any of INPUT 4 through INPUT 6 (HDMI terminal) on the rear  
or INPUT 7 (HDMI terminal) on the side of the flat panel TV instead of making video connections. If you connect an  
antenna cable directly to TV, you must first connect the cable to a splitter. For details, refer to the operating manual  
that came with the STB.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
Connect HDMI equipment (INPUT 4 through INPUT 6):  
Connect HDMI equipment (INPUT 7):  
T
T
W
W
Left side view  
Rear view  
HDMI compliant  
cable (HDMI cable  
having the HDMI  
mark)  
Audio cable  
(commercially  
available)  
HDMI compliant  
having the HDMI  
mark)  
Make this  
connection when  
inputting analog  
audio signals.  
HDMI equipment  
HDMI equipment  
INPUT 4 through INPUT 6 are HDMI terminals. Use  
INPUT 4 or INPUT 5 (HDMI) terminal when you also  
input analog audio signals. For details, refer to “5.2 Use  
HDMI Inputs.”  
Also use INPUT 7 (HDMI terminal) on the side of the  
panel when connecting HDMI equipment. For details,  
refer to “5.2 Use HDMI Inputs.”  
Connect a DVD player:  
Connect an AV receiver:  
T
T
T
T
W
W
W
W
Rear view  
Rear view  
This connection is  
not required when  
connecting an AV  
amp equipped with  
the surround  
Optical digital  
cable  
(commercially  
available)  
AV cable  
(commercially available)  
Component  
video cable  
(commercially  
available)  
AV cable  
(commercially  
available)  
function to a  
subwoofer.  
DVD player  
Subwoofer  
AV receiver  
Use an optical digital cable to connect an AV receiver to  
DIGITAL OUT terminal (optical). If your AV receiver does  
not have a DIGITAL IN terminal (optical), you may  
connect the panel’s AUDIO OUT terminal (audio) to the  
audio input terminal on the AV receiver. For details, refer  
to the operation manual that came with the AV receiver.  
Use INPUT 2 terminals when connecting a DVD player  
or other audiovisual equipment. If your DVD player has  
an HDMI terminal, use this connection instead of  
making video connections. For details, refer to the  
operation manual that came with the DVD player.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
Connect a VCR:  
Connect a game console or camcorder:  
T
T
W
W
Left side view  
Rear view  
AV cable  
(commercially  
available)  
S-Video cable  
(commercially  
available)  
AV cable  
(commercially  
available)  
VCR  
Camcorder/Game console  
Use INPUT 3 terminals when connecting a game  
console, camcorder or other audiovisual equipment.  
For details, refer to the operation manual that came  
with the game console or camcorder.  
Use INPUT 1 terminals when connecting a VCR or other  
equipment. For details, refer to the operation manual  
that came with the VCR.  
Connect control cords:  
Connect a PC:  
T
T
T
T
W
W
W
W
Rear view  
Rear view  
CONTROL  
IN  
Stereo sound cable  
with a mini plug  
(commercially  
available)  
RGB cable  
(commercially  
available)  
OUT  
(When PC audio is  
connected)  
Personal computer  
Use the PC INPUT terminal (Analog RGB) when  
connecting a PC. If you also connect PC audio, use PC  
INPUT (Audio) with a stereo sound cable with a mini  
plug (not provided). For details, refer to the operation  
manual that came with the PC.  
Connect control cords between the panel’s CONTROL  
(OUT) terminal and other Pioneer equipment having  
the SR logo. Use a mono sound cable with a mini plug  
(not provided).  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
2.6.3 Connect the Power Cord to the Panel  
The final connection is the power cord. Always connect the panel’s power cord to a three-pronged outlet, verifying  
that the cord is properly grounded. The cord includes a noise filter that reduces electrical interference from the  
wall outlet.  
As long as the flat panel TV is plugged in to an outlet, some power is drawn through the panel. When the flat panel  
TV is not going to be used for a long period, unplug the panel from the power outlet. Unplugging the panel extends  
the life of the plasma as well as saves energy.  
Plug the cord in to the panel but do NOT plug it in to a power outlet yet.  
T
T
W
W
2.7 Route then Bundle the Power Cord and Cables  
Once the flat panel TV is mounted and the speaker is attached, place additional equipment in the final position(s).  
Lay out the power cord, panel cables and any other device cables in a logical pattern that works for the location.  
Please consider the following points when routing cables:  
• Access to a 3-prong (grounded) power outlet  
• Space for the noise filter between the panel and outlet  
• Placement of cables under carpets or across walking paths  
Usually the cord/cables have slack or are too long. Although rubber bands are a good temporary solution to  
bundle cables, they tend to break down too quickly. To keep cables organized and neat, use the included cable  
clamps to bundle cables. The diagram below shows a bundled speaker cable.  
(PRO-151FD)  
Speaker cable  
Bundle cables in small  
groups when possible for  
easier separation later,  
if necessary.  
Cable clamp  
(PRO-111FD)  
Speaker cable  
T
T
W
W
Cable clamp  
A reusable cable clamp is designed to lock the bundled cables in place. Your flat panel TV has a total of four holes  
to attach cable clamps to the back of the panel. Use the cable clamps as necessary.  
PRO-151FD  
PRO-111FD  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Install Your Flat Panel TV  
02  
Follow the steps below to attach a cable clamp.  
1 ) Thread the clamp band through the holder and bundle the cable(s) in the cable clamp.  
2 ) Push and hold the levers then insert the hook into an appropriate hole on the rear of the flat panel TV.  
3 ) Pull up the clamp band to lock.  
1
Cable clamp  
2
4 ) Confirm that the cable clamp is seated firmly in the panel.  
Note: Avoid pinching or creating pressure points when routing or bundling cables.  
To remove the clamp band, pull and hold the latch to release.  
To remove the cable clamp, push and hold the levers then pull it out from the hole.  
Latch  
Lever  
Lever  
Note: The longer a clamp is in place, the better chance of deterioration. An older clamp is more easily damaged  
while being removed and may not be reusable.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
This chapter explores day-to-day operations such as powering on your flat panel TV, using the Home Menu, and  
adjusting the panel for the viewing area/room. The final section in this chapter provides hints and suggestions for  
those new to flat panel TV features.  
3.1 Turn the Flat Panel TV ON/OFF  
Your flat panel TV has three activity levels: Power On, Standby, and Power Off. Standby saves energy but allows  
the remote control to turn on the panel. The following instructions use the remote control. To operate the flat panel  
TV through the side panel buttons, refer to “1.2.1 Control Buttons and More on the Flat Panel TV” for button  
locations.  
Turn ON the Flat Panel TV  
To turn on the panel, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Plug the flat panel TV’s power cord in to a properly grounded outlet.  
2 ) Press any of the following buttons to turn the flat panel TV On.  
• Power On button (a) on the panel’s back in lower-left section (see page 9)  
STANDBY/ON button on the side of the panel (see page 8)  
• Remote control’s TV (a) button located in the upper left corner (see page 12).  
Images appear on the panel screen.  
Note: Use the remote control’s MUTING button to reduce any excessive static noise.  
3 ) Confirm that the Power ON indicator lights blue.  
(PRO-111FD)  
Sleep indicator  
Standby indicator  
Power On indicator  
Note: While in Standby, pressing the remote control’s TV (a) button causes the flat panel TV to turn On.  
Turn OFF the Flat Panel TV  
Turning off the flat panel TV can mean entering Standby so features such as Sleep are still functional or it can  
mean cutting power to the panel. Unless the flat panel TV is to sit idle for long periods, leave the panel in Standby.  
Note: While in Standby or when powered off, the flat panel TV continues to draw some power as long as the panel  
is plugged in to an outlet.  
Follow the steps below to place the panel in Standby.  
PowerOn Standby  
Indicator Indicator  
Flat Panel TV Status  
1 ) Press the remote control’s TV (a) button or  
panel’s STANDBY/ON button.  
Panel’s power cord is disconnected or  
the power cord is connected but the  
flat panel TV’s Power On button (a) is  
off  
2 ) Confirm that the Standby indicator lights red.  
The table to the right provides samples of how the  
indicators light. Monitor the indicators On the front of  
the panel to check the power status.  
Power is on but waiting for activation  
Note: Select from Auto, High, Mid and Low. Selecting  
Auto toggles the brightness of the Power On  
indicator between High, Mid and Low to match  
the brightness level of the viewing area. Refer  
to “Blue LED Dimmer” (page 46).  
Panel is in Standby  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
3.2 Program the Flat Panel TV for Television Viewing  
To watch TV and take advantage of some built-in features, choose the channel type or types (Analog, Digital),  
select a language, set your time zone, and program the channels. The sections below include how to set your  
channel type and how to use the Home Menu for each programming option.  
3.2.1 Choose Analog or Digital TV Channels  
To choose a channel setting, note the antenna input terminal connected to the back of the panel. Follow the  
directions below to select analog or digital TV channels.  
Located at the bottom of the remote control.  
TV  
2) Press TV/DTV on the remote control.  
INPUT  
Located at the top of the remote control.  
1
5
2
6
3
4
3) Select a channel option, analog or digital.  
During operation, press TV/DTV to toggle between  
TV signals.  
TV/DTV  
7
AV  
SCREEN  
SIZE  
DISPLAY  
SELECTION  
PC  
INPUT  
Note: See “2.6.1 Add Analog (conventional) and Digital  
TV Channels” for more information about channel  
setting options.  
SELECT  
EDIT/LEARN  
TV CBL  
DVD  
RCV SAT VCR DVR  
Note: When watching TV and separate video image (multi-screen), pressing the remote control’s TV/DTV button  
changes only the TV signal appearing on the left side of the panel.  
3.2.2 Explore the Home Menu  
The Home Menu is the main menu for the flat panel TV. Most commands and settings are programmed through  
this menu. The following section describes a typical method for working with the panel’s menus. For actual  
procedures, see the appropriate page(s) that describe a function.  
1) Press HOME MENU on the remote  
Home Menu screen  
Remote control  
to access the main menu.  
SAT GUIDE  
Channel  
Favorites  
Input  
2) Use the Up/Down arrows (/ ) to  
DVD  
TOP MENU  
highlight a menu item.  
ENTER  
3) Use the Left/Right arrows (/ )  
to scroll through options for that  
menu item.  
Home Media Gallery  
HOME  
MENU  
HDMI Control  
Setup  
RETURN  
SAT / DVD MENU  
4) Highlight the selected menu option.  
5) Press ENTER to lock in the change.  
6) Press RETURN to move back to a previous menu/submenu page when changing more than a single option.  
7) Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu screen.  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
03  
This chart provides a breakdown of the Home Menu for both AV and PC sources.  
AV Source  
Channel  
Favorites  
Input  
Home Media Gallery  
HDMI Control  
Pg  
42  
42  
42  
93  
86  
Option  
PC Source  
Channel  
Favorites  
Input  
Home Media Gallery  
HDMI Control  
Pg  
42  
42  
42  
93  
86  
Option  
Setup  
Picture  
57 AV Selection  
61 Contrast*  
61 Color*  
Setup  
Picture  
57 AV Selection  
61 Contrast  
61 Brightness  
61 Red  
61 Tint*  
61 Green  
64 Pro Adjust*  
63 PureCinema**  
48 OPTIMUM  
61 Reset  
49 Treble  
49 Bass  
49 Balance  
49 Reset  
61 Blue  
61 Reset  
49 Treble  
49 Bass  
49 Balance  
75 Sound Effect  
49 Reset  
75 AVC  
56 Energy Save  
77 Power Management  
Sound  
Sound  
Power Control  
Sleep Timer  
Option  
44  
122 Auto Setup  
122 Manual Setup  
84 HDMI Input  
91 HDMI Control Setting  
56 Orbiter  
43 Label Input  
42 Channel Mode  
43 Sort Favorites  
75 AVC  
Power Control  
56 Energy Save  
76 No Signal off  
76 No Operation off  
Sleep Timer  
Option  
44  
47 Position  
59 Auto Size  
62 Side Mask  
Favorites Setup  
56 Orbiter  
56 Video Pattern  
55 Screen Protection  
System Setup  
38 Auto Installation  
39 Analog TV Setup  
41 Digital Tuner Setup  
50 Parental Control  
72 Closed Captions  
121 Digital Audio Output  
50 Change Password  
37 Language  
124 Technical Info  
42 Channel Mode  
43 Sort Favorites  
Favorites Setup  
*
Available when any option other than OPTIMUM is selected from the  
AV Selection menu.  
** Access this option through the Pro Adjust menu when any option  
other than OPTIMUM is selected from the AV Selection menu.  
*** Available only when OPTIMUM is selected from the AV Selection  
menu  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
TV Screen Components  
Your flat panel TV has easy-to-read menus and graphic symbols that provide quick access to the desired options.  
Menus appearing in this manual may differ slightly from the actual menus but the functionality remains the  
same.  
1
2
3
Exit  
Sound  
TELEVISION  
Treble  
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
Bass  
Balance  
Sound Effect  
Reset  
4
8
AVC  
:
Off  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
HOME MENU  
Return  
5
6
7
1 - Exit button: Close the menu to return to TV  
6 - Operation Guide area: Display the operational  
guidelines for the selected option(s)  
viewing  
2 - Menu title: Display the selected menu title  
3 - TOOLS button: Display the TOOLS Menu  
4 - Menu: Select an option  
7 - Return button: Return to the previous menu  
screen  
8 - Picture preview (in reduced size)  
5 - HOME MENU button: Close the menu to return  
to TV viewing  
3.2.3 Assign a Language  
The default menu language is English. To assign a different language for menus and on-screen information,  
follow the steps below.  
1 ) Press HOME MENU.  
2 ) Select Setup from the main menu.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option then press ENTER.  
3 ) Select System Setup from the Setup menu.  
4 ) Select Language from the System Setup menu.  
5 ) Select a language from the submenu.  
Menu  
:
English  
6 ) Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
3.2.4 Set the Clock  
Set the flat panel TV’s clock to take advantage of many built-in features such as Time Zone and D.S.T. (Daylight  
Saving Time) activation for digital TV broadcast.  
Note: If the panel’s power cord is unplugged or there is a power outage, the time must be reset.  
Follow the steps below to set the clock.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Digital Tuner Setup from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select Clock from the Digital Tuner Setup menu.  
4 ) Select Time Zone from the options.  
5 ) Select the time zone for your area.  
Time Zone  
D.S.T.  
:
:
Atlantic  
On  
6 ) Select the menu option D.S.T. to activate/deactivate Daylight Saving Time.  
7 ) Select the proper option for your location.  
8 ) Press HOME MENU to close the menu and exit.  
3.2.5 Create the List of Channels  
This section describes how to search for and set up TV channels. There are two ways to add channels to your flat  
panel TV, Auto Installation for automatic channel selection or manual channel assignments. The Auto Installation  
adds all available channels from your selected TV provider. Once all channels are added to the list, simply delete  
any unwanted channels. This section provides steps to add/remove channels.  
Auto Installation  
Auto Installation searches for and adds TV channels to your list of viewable channels. Using the remote control,  
follow the steps below to automatically select all available channels.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Auto Installation from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select Air/Cable, Language, or Time Zone from the Auto Installation menu.  
4 ) Select an option.  
• Signal type: Air or Cable  
• Language: English, Français or Español  
• Time Zone: Atlantic, Eastern, Central, Mountain, Pacific, Alaska, or Hawaii  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
5 ) Select Start.  
The panel automatically begins creating your list of channels.  
Language  
Air/Cable  
Time Zone  
:
:
:
English  
Cable  
Atlantic  
Start  
Note: To quit Auto Installation before it is complete, press RETURN to recall the Auto Installation screen then  
EXIT.  
Manual Channel Selection  
To add channels without using the Auto Installation option, follow the directions below. Also, if a channel is  
skipped in error, use this method to add the channel to your list.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Analog TV Setup from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select Manual Adjust from the Analog TV Setup menu.  
4 ) Select Program Entry.  
5 ) Select a channel number to be added.  
Use the arrow buttons (/) to enter a channel number.  
6 ) Select Store from the Manual Adjust menu.  
7 ) Select Yes from the submenu.  
Program Entry  
Store  
:
:
:
1
Yes  
On  
Tuner NR  
8 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu after all wanted channels have been added.  
Note: Analog channels can be added manually but digital channels can only be added using the Add New  
Channels button on the Digital Tuner Setup menu.  
Add New Channels  
To add new channels, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Digital Tuner Setup from the System Setup menu.  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
3 ) Select Installation from the Digital Tuner Setup menu.  
Installation  
Channel management  
Clock  
4 ) Select Add New Channels.  
Channel search starts automatically. If a new channel is found, it is stored automatically in the flat panel  
TV.  
To cancel channel search before it finishes, press RETURN.  
Software Keyboard  
This on-screen keyboard allows labeling manually added TV channels. Channel labels can be up to eight  
characters long to help channel identification. To use the Software Keyboard for labeling TV channels, follow the  
steps below.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Analog TV Setup from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select Label from the Analog TV Setup menu.  
4 ) Select Program Entry from the submenu.  
5 ) Select a program number.  
• Cable: 1 through 135  
• Air: 2 through 69  
6 ) Select Label.  
The Software Keyboard screen appears.  
Label  
I
N P U  
1
2
B
L
V
'
3
C
M
W
(
4
D
N
X
)
5
E
O
Y
+
6
F
P
Z
-
7
G
Q
,
8
H
R
.
9
I
0
J
A
K
U
&
Delete  
Space  
Caps  
S
:
T
;
*
/
_
@
OK  
Cancel  
7 ) Select the first character.  
The cursor moves to the next character space.  
8 ) Repeat the previous step to enter up to eight characters.  
To change a character, use or to highlight the character then press ENTER. The cursor moves to the  
previous or next character.  
To delete the entered character, highlight the character, select Delete then press ENTER.  
To put a space after the entered character, highlight the space, select Space then press ENTER.  
To toggle between upper case and lower case, highlight the character, select Caps then press ENTER.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
9 ) Select OK then press ENTER.  
The entry is complete.  
10 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
3.2.6 Skip or Delete Unwanted Channels  
The Auto Installation process adds all channels available from your TV service provider. However, there may be  
some channels that are unwanted or are not age-appropriate for your home. This section explains how to bypass  
or delete unwanted channels when moving up/down one channel at a time and what programs are available for  
viewing.  
To skip or delete unwanted channels, use the remote’s CH+/CH– buttons to reset the status for those channels.  
Follow the steps below to change a channel’s status.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Digital Tuner Setup or Analog TV Setup from the System Setup menu.  
• Digital TV channels: Channel management > Channel Options > (Channel Delete) > (On)  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
00001.000  
00002.000  
00003.000  
00004.000  
00005.000  
00006.000  
00007.000  
00008.000  
00009.000  
3 ) Scroll to or highlight an unwanted channel number.  
4 ) Press ENTER to reverse the status for that channel.  
When there is a check mark next to the channel, it disappears.  
5 ) Press RETURN.  
A confirmation screen appears.  
6 ) Select Yes then press ENTER.  
The Channel Delete setting is complete.  
7 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
If you select the  
(Channel Skip) option in Step 3, the setting is complete when exiting the Channel  
Options menu (no confirmation screen appears). Skip Steps 5 and 6.  
The instructions for restoring a skipped channel are the same as above. In Step 4 a check mark appears next to  
the added/restored channel.  
To skip an analog channel, follow the steps below.  
• Analog TV channels: Manual Adjust > Store > No  
Radio Skip  
This function allows skipping of radio channels at a time. To set this option, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Digital Tuner Setup from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select Channel management from the Digital Tuner Setup menu.  
4 ) Select Radio Skip from the Channel management menu.  
5 ) Select On.  
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
3.2.7 Channel List  
Your flat panel TV offers three channel lists for quick access to a desired channel: Favorites List, Channel List and  
Input List.  
Favorites List: Display your favorite channel numbers/names up to 20 channels (analog channels, Input 1 through  
7, PC), 20 digital channels, and 1 Home Media Gallery (top screen, see page 98)  
Store your most frequently viewed channels in the Favorites List. To display the Favorites List, press ENTER while  
showing a TV channel. For another method to access the Favorites List, follow the directions below.  
1 ) Press HOME MENU.  
2 ) Select Favorites from the main menu.  
Pressing the / button while showing the Channel List or Input List also causes the Favorites List to  
appear.  
Channel List: Display all analog/digital TV channels in each broadcast network group  
To display the Channel List, follow the directions below.  
1 ) Press HOME MENU.  
2 ) Select Channel from the main menu.  
Pressing the / button while showing the Favorites List or Input List also causes the Channel List to  
appear.  
Input List: Display external input source names from INPUT 1 through INPUT 7 and PC  
To display the Input List, follow the directions below.  
1 ) Press HOME MENU.  
2 ) Select Input from the main menu.  
Pressing the / button while showing the Favorites List or Channel List also causes the Input List to  
appear.  
Note: After selecting the desired channel, pressing ENTER causes the Channel List to close and the selected  
screen appears. Pressing RETURN or EXIT causes the Channel List to close and the screen before  
selection returns. Press an arrow button to cycle through the lists when viewing any of the lists.  
Favorites  
INPUT 6  
XXXXXX  
XXXXXX  
XXXXXX  
XXXXXX  
PC  
00001.000  
00004.000  
00007.000  
00009.000  
XXXXXX  
XXXXXX  
XXXXXX  
XXXXXX  
1/2  
00013.002  
00015.000  
00024.000  
Set Favorite Channels  
Select up to ten (10) channels per list page, up to five pages for a total of 41 favorite channels. To assign channels  
to your Favorites or All, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Favorites Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Channel Mode from the Favorites Setup menu.  
3 ) Select All or Favorites from the Channel Mode menu.  
To assign all channels, select All. To assign the registered channels, select Favorites.  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
4 ) Select a TV channel to store.  
If the screen fails to fit in the window, a scroll bar appears.  
Pressing ENTER while watching a TV program also causes the favorite channel list to appear. If the  
Favorites list is empty, “No Favorites List.” appears.  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Alternate Method to Store your Favorite Channels  
Use the TOOLS Menu to store TV channels, external input sources including PC, and Home Media Gallery  
contents. To store channels, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select Favorites Entry.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option.  
3 ) Select On (/ ).  
The channel you are watching is stored in the favorite list.  
To cancel, use the arrow button to select Off.  
Notes:  
• Pressing EXIT, RETURN, or TOOLS again causes the TOOLS Menu to disappear.  
• Once the maximum number of channels are stored, a warning screen appears.  
To quit the procedure before it finishes, press EXIT or RETURN on the remote control.  
Sort Favorite Channels  
To sort theough the store channels, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Favorites Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Sort Favorites from the Favorites Setup menu.  
3 ) Select a channel to move.  
4 ) Select a new location then press ENTER.  
The selected channel is moved to the new location. To sort another channel(s), repeat Steps 3 and 4.  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Edit the Input List  
To change name of an Input, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Label Input from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select an input or PC.  
The software keyboard appears.  
4 ) Enter the new name.  
Label  
K
I
D S  
1
2
B
L
V
'
3
C
M
W
(
4
D
N
X
)
5
E
O
Y
+
6
F
P
Z
-
7
G
Q
,
8
H
R
.
9
I
0
J
A
K
U
&
Delete  
Space  
Caps  
S
:
T
;
*
/
_
@
OK  
Cancel  
5 ) Select OK to save the name and exit the menu.  
To cancel, press HOME MENU.  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
3.3 Quick Start for Watching Television  
03  
Your flat panel TV has many functions and features, some of which you may simply lack the time to set when first  
installing the panel. To begin watching TV quickly, refer to the basic information within this section. However, when  
it is convenient, we strongly suggest going through the rest of this manual and learning all that your flat panel TV  
can do.  
3.3.1 Change the Channel/Sub-Channel  
With the remote control pointed at the panel’s remote  
sensor, press the CH + button to sequentially change to the  
next highest available channel. The CH – button  
sequentially changes down to the next lowest available  
channel. Each press of CH + or CH – causes the channel to  
change sequentially from station to station. To return to the  
previous channel, press CH RETURN. To toggle between  
the two channels, press CH RETURN again. Each press of  
this button switches the channel between these two  
stations.  
Another option for changing the channel is to use the number buttons (0 through 9). Simply press the number  
buttons in the order needed for that channel. For example, enter Channel 231 as 2 - 3 - 1 or Channel 4 as the single  
number, 4.  
A recent addition to TV viewing is the Sub-channel. A digital channel can be split in to multiple signals. Each  
signal, called a sub-channel, can carry a different program. To watch a sub-channel, use a combination of number  
buttons and the dot (.) button. For example, if Channel 5 is digital and has three active sub-channels, enter 5 . 2  
to reach the second sub-channel.  
Note: To tune in a program more quickly, enter the channel or sub-channel then press CH ENTER.  
3.3.2 Adjust the Volume/Sound  
With the remote control pointed at the panel’s remote sensor, press and hold VOL+ to increase the sound volume  
gradually. Holding down VOL– decreases the volume at the same rate. A single press of VOL+ or VOL– causes  
the volume to adjust by minor increments.  
To silence all sound, press MUTING. The muting symbol ( e ) appears on screen. To return the volume to the  
previous level, press MUTING again. Pressing VOL+ once also increases the volume one step higher than the  
current level and cancels the muting mode.  
If the panel’s default sound level is too loud or too soft, refer to “3.4.6 General Sound (Audio) Adjustment.”  
3.3.3 Turn On the Sleep Timer  
To save energy and to maximize the life of your flat panel TV, try using the Sleep Timer for occasions when the  
panel may be left on by accident. The Sleep Timer places the panel in Standby when the selected time elapses.  
The Sleep Timer provides time periods of 30, 60, 90, or 120 minutes. When the Timer is down to five minutes, a  
reminder appears on screen each minute until the time has elapsed.  
To set the Sleep Timer, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Sleep Timer through the Setup.  
2 ) Select the desired time period.  
Select between 30 minutes and 2 hours (120 minutes).  
3 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
The SLEEP indicator on the front of the flat panel TV lights orange when the Sleep Timer is set. To check the  
remaining time, press TOOLS then select Sleep. “Remain ---min” appears at the top of the menu screen. After  
Note: When the sleep timer has been set, “Remain ---min” appears at the top of the menu. However, the Video  
Pattern timer has priority over the sleep timer. When the Video Pattern timer is on, the sleep timer is  
deactivated. Video Pattern is explained fully later in this manual.  
3.4 Adjust the Picture and Sound Quality  
Your flat panel TV has many adjustment options for the picture and the sound to make it just right for you. This  
section provides basic adjustments but for detailed video/audio modifications, refer to “4 Additional Picture and  
Sound Adjustment Options” and “4.7 Select Alternatives for/to Sound.”  
3.4.1 Adjust the Picture for Your Room Lighting  
The flat panel TV senses the amount of light in your room and automatically adjusts the screen brightness for the  
best picture. Bright rooms require stronger coloring so images appear crisp while dimly lit rooms allow the  
picture to use more subtle coloring. Set the Color Sensor function to On for best coloring possible for the selected  
image and viewing environment (refer to “2.5 Attach the Color Sensor” on page 26 for details on how to attach  
the sensor).  
The panel ships with the Room Light Sensor turned Off. The sections below provide directions to turn the room  
lighting sensor and color sensor On/Off.  
Room Lighting Sensor  
To deactivate/reactivate the room lighting sensor, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Room Light Sensor from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select Mode 1 or Mode 2 (or Off ) from the submenu.  
Option  
Description  
Off  
No effect  
Mode 1  
automatically adjusts the picture brightness for the  
best possible image quality based on the  
information collected at the Room Light Sensor  
and Color Sensor  
Mode 2  
automatically adjusts the picture brightness and  
coloring for best image quality possible for the  
viewing environment based on the information  
collected at the Room Light Sensor and Color  
Sensor  
Note: If the color sensor is not in use, adjustments are made for Mode 1 and Mode 2 based on the information  
collected at the Room Light Sensor.  
Game Control Pref  
Room Light Sensor  
Screen Protection  
Label Input  
:
:
Off  
Off  
4 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
Blue LED Dimmer  
Adjust the brightness of the POWER ON indicator depending on the brightness level of the viewing area. Setting  
to Auto toggles the brightness of the indicator between High, Mid and Low to match the brightness level of the  
viewing area. To set the indicator, follow the directions below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Blue LED Dimmer from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select Auto, High, Mid or Low from the submenu.  
4 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
3.4.2 General Picture (Video) Adjustment for an AV Source  
The directions below apply to all AV sources except OPTIMUM. If the viewing option is OPTIMUM, your flat panel  
TV automatically adjusts the picture to the best possible level.  
1 ) Access the Picture through the Setup.  
2 ) Select an item to be adjusted.  
Contrast is used in the example below.  
Picture  
AV Selection  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
:
:
:
:
:
:
PERFORMANCE  
40  
0
0
Tint  
0
Sharpness  
Pro Adjust  
Reset  
0
3 ) Use the arrow buttons (/) to adjust to the desired level.  
32  
Contrast  
4 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Reduce Noise from Analog TV  
Sometimes electronic signal static can cause imperfections in the picture. This static is called Video Noise. Your  
flat panel TV can reduce video noise from an analog TV channel, depending on the broadcast signal level.  
Sometimes the broadcast signal has higher interference levels so that some video noise is noticeable.  
This function is only selectable for signals from an antenna. Follow the steps below to reduce noise on an analog  
TV channel.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Analog TV Setup from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select Manual Adjust from the submenu.  
Only analog channels set using Auto Installation are manually adjustable.  
4 ) Select Program Entry.  
5 ) Select a channel number to be added.  
Use the arrow buttons (/) to enter a channel number.  
6 ) Select Tuner NR.  
7 ) Select On.  
The default setting is On.  
8 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
Picture Image Position  
Each input source stores the picture adjustment settings for that view. Although repositioning is available in most  
screen views, when the screen is set to Dot-by-Dot, the Position menu is unavailable. Also, depending on the  
displayed video, the image position may not change after an adjustment.  
To adjust the picture’s horizontal and vertical position, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Position from the Option menu.  
Position  
Auto Size  
:
Off  
Side Mask  
HDMI Input  
HDMI Control Setting  
Blue LED Dimmer  
Orbiter  
:
:
Auto  
Off  
Video Pattern  
3 ) Select H/V Position Adjust from the submenu.  
4 ) Adjust the vertical and/or horizontal positioning using the arrow buttons.  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Restore Default Picture  
After making multiple adjustments, it may be difficult to reverse improper settings. To restore the factory default  
video settings, follow the directions below.  
1 ) Highlight Reset from the Picture menu.  
2 ) Press ENTER to continue with the picture reset.  
A confirmation screen appears asking if settings should be returned to the factory defaults.  
3 ) Use the arrow buttons to highlight Yes.  
4 ) Press ENTER.  
All video settings return to the original default values when selecting options other than OPTIMUM or PC.  
When OPTIMUM is selected, video settings for OPTIMUM. AV Selection menus, and Sound Control  
settings return to the original default values.  
3.4.3 Compare Images When Adjusting the Picture  
When adjusting the picture, look for an overall improvement by adjusting each parameter or option one at a time.  
Many small adjustments lead to the best picture for your viewing area. As each option changes, refer back to the  
previously set image for comparison. This section includes adjustment notes and steps to adjust the flat panel  
TV’s picture.  
Each parameter/option must be adjusted separately. For example, if two options under AV Selection,  
PERFORMANCE and MOVIE need adjustment, change/compare one option then save the preferred setting  
before moving on to the other option. Below are other guidelines to follow when adjusting the picture.  
• Adjustments are available while on the After screen. Trying to make adjustments while on the Before causes  
a warning message to appear.  
• Switch to another parameter/option only from the After screen. If viewing the Before screen when selecting  
another option, the Before data is lost.  
• Exiting an option from the Before screen stores that previous entry in memory and deactivates the button.  
• Exiting an option from the After screen stores the new entry in memory and deactivates the TOOLS button.  
• Moving/changing the AV Selection parameter/option stores the option setting in memory (button continues  
to work).  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
Follow the steps below to adjust options for the preferred picture quality.  
1 ) Access the Picture through the Setup.  
2 ) Select an option.  
3 ) Use the TOOLS button to toggle between the previous and adjusted images.  
4 ) Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to continue adjusting the option as needed.  
5 ) Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to adjust other picture options.  
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Note: if no selections are made within 60 seconds, the menu closes automatically and the current settings are  
saved to memory.  
To exit the menu without saving the changes, switch to the Before screen then press HOME MENU.  
3.4.4 Display a Graphical Picture/Sound Adjustment Screen  
Selecting OPTIMUM from the AV Selection menu causes the Picture menu to display different AV source  
submenus. Select On for the Sound Control option to automatically adjust the sound quality, and OPTIMUM  
Performance provides an on-screen graphic monitor for multiple picture and sound adjustments.  
OPTIMUM Performance  
OPTIMUM Performance displays on-going picture and sound adjustments using graphical data when selecting  
OPTIMUM from the AV Selection menu. OPTIMUM Performance provides the following bar graph data:  
• Analyzer: Histogram, RGB, Room Light, Color Sensor  
• Picture: Contrast, Brightness, Color, Sharpness, Color Temp, Gamma  
• Sound: Level  
OPTIMUM Performance  
[OPTIMUM] On  
[Analyzer]  
[Picture]  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
[Sound]  
Histogram  
RGB  
Sharpness  
Color Temp  
Gamma  
60 1k 12k(Hz)  
Room Light  
Color Sensor : Disable  
OPTIMUM On/Off  
To display OPTIMUM Performance, follow the procedure below.  
1 ) Access the Picture through the Setup.  
2 ) Select AV Selection from the Picture menu.  
3 ) Select OPTIMUM from the AV Selection menu.  
4 ) Select OPTIMUM Performance from the Picture menu.  
The OPTIMUM Performance appears. To cancel the OPTIMUM Performance option, press EXIT.  
Note: When OPTIMUM is selected, press and hold DISPLAY on the remote control to show OPTIMUM  
Performance.  
OPTIMUM Performance compares the picture and sound quality between “Off” (unadjusted) and “On”  
(adjusted using the TOOLS button).  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
3.4.5 Sound Control  
Setting the Sound Control option to On automatically adjusts to the highest sound quality possible for the  
selected image and viewing environment. This option is also available when OPTIMUM is selected in the AV  
Selection menu. To activate Sound Control, follow the procedure below.  
1 ) Access the Picture through the Setup.  
2 ) Select AV Selection from the Picture menu.  
3 ) Select OPTIMUM from the AV Selection menu.  
4 ) Select Sound Control from the Picture menu.  
5 ) Select On.  
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Note: When Sound Control from the Picture menu is selected, the only Sound menu option available is AVC (Auto  
Volume Control).  
3.4.6 General Sound (Audio) Adjustment  
Many prefer a heavier base when watching movies or music videos from an AV source or on TV. Others like a more  
balanced sound. To adjust the sound to your preference, follow the directions below.  
1 ) Access the Sound through the Setup.  
2 ) Select an option for adjustment.  
Treble  
:
:
:
0
0
0
Bass  
Balance  
Sound Effect  
Reset  
AVC  
:
Off  
3 ) Use the left/right arrow buttons (/) to adjust the option.  
Option Left Button  
Treble weakens tone  
weakens tone  
shifts audio balance to the left shifts audio balance to the right  
Right Button  
strengthens tone  
strengthens tone  
Base  
Balance  
4 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Restore Default Sound Setting  
To restore the factory default sound settings, follow the directions below.  
1 ) Highlight Reset from the Sound menu.  
2 ) Press ENTER to continue with the sound reset.  
A confirmation screen appears asking if settings should be returned to the factory defaults.  
3 ) Use the arrow buttons to highlight Yes.  
4 ) Press ENTER to restore all sound settings to the original default values.  
Note: The Auto Volume Control (AVC) setting cannot be restored to the factory default.  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
3.5 Block Programs, Channels, or Content  
03  
Although blocking programs, channels, or content is optional, some images may be inappropriate for all family  
members. Your flat panel TV supports a blocking function known as Parental Control. With Parental Control  
activated, certain material fails to appear on screen if it is beyond your select viewing level. Parental Control uses  
recognized rating systems but also allows blocks placed at your discretion. This section explains the different  
blocking functions and how to assign each type.  
Note: When watching a TV program, you may see an emergency alert message scrolling at the top of the screen.  
The television station is broadcasting the emergency message as a test or an alert in a real emergency. The  
flat panel TV ships with this function active. For information about emergency messages, refer to “3.5.3  
Assign a Rating System to Create Blocks”.  
3.5.1 Assign a Parental Control (Block) Password  
With Parental Control, inappropriate TV programs, VCR recordings, and DVD content can be blocked. When  
someone attempts to watch a blocked program or content, the flat panel TV displays the password window.  
Parental Control applies to both analog and digital material.  
To ensure that your blocks are not removed in error, the flat panel TV requires a password to change access to  
blocked programs, channels, or content. The default password for your panel is 1234. We strongly recommend  
changing the password to a four-digit code that is meaningful to you.  
Follow the steps below to change the password.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Change Password from the System Setup menu.  
Please InputYour Password.  
3 ) Enter the current four-digit code using the 0 through 9 buttons.  
A confirmation message appears on screen.  
4 ) Enter your new password.  
5 ) Enter your new password a second time when prompted.  
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Write your new password:  
If you forget your password:  
When “Please Input Your  
Password” appears at Step 4,  
press and hold the ENTER button  
for three or more seconds.  
The password reverts to the  
default password, 1234.  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
3.5.2 Activate Parental Control  
The Parental Control function must be active for the panel to block content. If this option is turned Off, blocked  
programs appear on screen. To activate Parental Control blocking, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Parental Control.  
The password entry screen appears.  
3 ) Enter your four-digit code using the 0 through 9 buttons.  
4 ) Select Status.  
Status  
:
Off  
MPAA Ratings  
TV Parental Guidelines  
Canadian English Ratings  
Canadian French Ratings  
Unavailable Ratings  
:
View  
Digital Regional Ratings  
5 ) Select On to activate Parental Control.  
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
When a program is blocked, a (B) appears in appropriate rating boxes. If a channel is blocked but the Parental  
Control system is turned off, the symbol is a (V) and the channel/program is viewable.  
FV  
B
D
B
B
B
V
The lock symbol here marks  
blocked TV ratings.  
3.5.3 Assign a Rating System to Create Blocks  
Besides choosing to block certain channels, you may use one of the recognized rating systems to block programs  
and/or content. Your panel recognizes the following rating systems:  
• TV ratings  
• TV Parental Guidelines including unrated programming  
• Motion Picture Association of America (MPAA for movies)  
• Canadian English/French rating systems  
Note: Your flat panel TV ships with all ratings unblocked.  
To block TV or other content using a rating system, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Parental Control from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select one of the rating systems from the submenu.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
MPAA Ratings menu  
TV Parental Guidelines menu  
N/A  
G
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
View  
View  
View  
View  
View  
View  
View  
FV  
B
D
L
S
V
TV-None  
TV-Y  
B
B
B
V
V
V
V
PG  
TV-Y7  
TV-G  
PG-13  
R
TV-PG  
TV-14  
TV-MA  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
NC-17  
NR  
Canadian English Ratings menu  
Canadian French Ratings menu  
E
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
View  
View  
E
:
:
:
:
:
:
View  
View  
View  
View  
View  
View  
C
G
C8+  
G
View  
8 ans+  
13 ans+  
16 ans+  
18 ans+  
Block  
Block  
Block  
Block  
PG  
14+  
18+  
Unavailable Ratings menu  
Digital Regional Ratings menu  
Status  
:
Off  
Status  
:
Off  
MPAA Ratings  
MPAA Ratings  
TV Parental Guidelines  
Canadian English Ratings  
Canadian French Ratings  
TV Parental Guidelines  
Canadian English Ratings  
Canadian French Ratings  
Unavailable Ratings  
:
View  
Unavailable Ratings  
:
View  
Digital Regional Ratings  
Digital Regional Ratings  
4 ) Use the arrow buttons to highlight a block level for that rating system.  
5 ) Press ENTER to reverse the blocked status for the highlighted TV Parental Guideline option.  
A block (B) or view (V) symbol appears in appropriate rating boxes. For other rating options, press / to  
toggle between block and view.  
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
When a rating is blocked, all more severe ratings are blocked as well. For example, blocking TV rating TV-PG  
(Parental guidance suggested) automatically blocks TV-14 (Parents strongly cautioned) and TV-MA (Mature  
audiences only). In turn, unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to become automatically available.  
Program Rating of “None”  
The flat panel TV also provides a rating setting that blocks programs with a rating of None. The US TV Parental  
Guidelines Rating system identifies programs with a None rating level. Examples of programs with a rating of  
None are as follows:  
• Emergency Bulletins (such as EAS messages, weather warning and others)  
• Locally originated programming  
• Public Service Announcements  
• News  
• Politics  
• Religion  
• Sports  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
To block a program with a rating of None, follow the steps below.  
2 ) Select Parental Control from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select TV Parental Guidelines from the Parental Control menu.  
4 ) Select TV-None from the submenu.  
5 ) Select an option (View or Block ).  
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Refer to “8.1 Ratings Charts (for Various Audience Classifications)” for detailed information about the different  
rating systems.  
Block Not Rated Programs  
With some TV programs, the rating information is unavailable. To block these programs, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Parental Control from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select Unavailable Ratings from the Parental Control menu.  
4 ) Select an option (View or Block ).  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Note: Your flat panel TV ships with this option set to View.  
New Ratings System for Digital Broadcasts  
Some Digital broadcasts carry new ratings that are not compatible with the panel’s original Parental Control  
settings. When first tuning to one of these broadcasts, the Digital Regional Ratings menu appears on screen.  
Change the Parental Control settings to handle the new ratings. Otherwise, previous blocked ratings may become  
unblocked.  
Note: Adding the new rating does not cause programs with this rating system to be blocked automatically.  
To add the new rating system to your panel, follow the directions below.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Parental Control from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select Digital Regional Ratings from the submenu.  
A list of available ratings appears.  
4 ) Select from the available ratings.  
5 ) Select a level from the available ratings.  
6 ) Select View or Block.  
7 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
Delete a New Ratings System  
If an added ratings system is no longer needed, delete the ratings system from your flat panel TV. It is unnecessary  
to remove blocks from individual channels or programs. Deleting the ratings line removes any/all blocks initiated  
with that system.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Parental Control from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select Digital Regional Ratings from the submenu.  
4 ) Select RRT Reset to delete the new ratings system from the flat panel TV.  
The message “Reset digital regional ratings?” appears.  
5 ) Select OK.  
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
While the Parental Control menu is open, the status display remains unchanged even if the system receives  
broadcasts carrying new ratings.  
3.5.4 Temporarily Remove a Block  
The password entry screen appears when detecting the blocked rating signals (with the picture and sound turned  
off). Entering your four-digit password allows you to view the program until your flat panel TV is placed into  
Standby or turned Off. To temporarily remove a block, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Tune the flat panel TV to the blocked channel.  
2 ) Wait for the Block message to appear on screen.  
3 ) Enter the four-digit password.  
The password window appears. When a four-digit password is entered, or no operation is performed within  
60 seconds, the window disappears. To recall the window after it disappears, change the channel or input  
source then return before repeating the above steps.  
Please InputYour Password.  
For INPUT 2 (except 480i signals) and INPUT 4 through INPUT 7, the password entry screen appears when Block  
is selected from the Unavailable Ratings menu.  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
3.6 Smart Starts for New Owners  
03  
Many of the flat panel TV features make it easy to use but also environmentally friendlier. This section explains  
how to extend the life of your panel while being energy efficient. We suggest applying all of the following functions  
below for the simplest usage, best quality, and longest life span.  
3.6.1 Use the TOOLS Menu  
To change the current menu to another option, the on-screen TOOLS Menu provides short-cuts to the available  
selections even while watching a program. To display the menu, press TOOLS on the remote control. The menus  
shown in this section differ, depending upon the menu.  
EXIT  
TOOLS  
TELEVISION  
TOOLS  
Sound  
Random  
SAT GUIDE  
DVD  
All  
Play Mode : Single  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
Time Search  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
The TOOLS Menu provides short-cuts to the selectable menu options  
while watching a program.  
SAT / DVD MENU  
Use the arrow buttons to toggle between options. The setting is complete as soon as the selected option appears  
in the center of the screeen. When showing two screens, the TOOLS Menu appears on the main screen.  
3.6.2 Extend Your Panel Life  
This function provides short-cuts to your panel’s longer service life. Your flat panel TV includes the Screen  
Protection option. Activating this option causes the panel to automatically select the several different features  
that can prolong the life of your panel and help alleviate after-image ghosts or burn-in. To set this option, follow  
the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Screen Protection from the Option menu.  
A confirmation screen appears.  
3 ) Select Yes from the submenu.  
The following settings are automatically entered:  
•Auto Size: Wide-Zoom  
•Side Mask - Detection: Mode 1  
•Orbiter (AV source): Mode 1  
•Orbiter (PC source): Mode 1  
•Energy Save: Mode 1  
4 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Basic Operations For Television Viewing  
03  
3.6.3 Turn On the Image Orbiter  
A built-in feature to protect against burn-in is the Orbiter function. Orbiter automatically changes the position of  
the picture imperceptibly while the image is on screen. To activate the Orbiter, follow the steps below. To cancel  
this function, select Off in Step 3.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Orbiter from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select Mode 1 or Mode 2.  
• AV source Mode 1: for any screen mode except Dot by Dot  
• AV source Mode 2: for all available screen modes  
• PC source Mode 1: to enable the Orbiter  
• PC source Mode 2: to smooth the text/character appearance  
4 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Note: The farthest edges of an image may be hidden at times as the picture position shifts. Also, when the Orbiter  
function is set to Mode 1 or Mode 2, the image may appear to drop slightly on the screen.  
3.6.4 Trigger the Screen-Saving Video Pattern Periodically  
The Video Pattern function causes the screen to appear white, which helps to alleviate after-image ghosts or burn-  
in. While the Video Pattern screen is on, only the remote’s TV (a) button and the panel’s STANDBY/ON button  
is available. The panel automatically switches to Standby one hour after running the Video Pattern screen. To  
cancel the Video Pattern screen, press the remote’s TV (a) or the panel’s STANDBY/ON.  
To activate the Video Pattern screen, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Video Pattern from the Option menu.  
A confirmation screen appears.  
3 ) Select Start from the submenu.  
The Video Pattern screen appears.  
4 ) Leave the panel alone for a minimum of one hour.  
Note: The Video Pattern timer has priority over Sleep Timer, No Signal off, and No Power off (Power Management)  
settings.  
3.6.5 Activate Energy Save to Reduce Power Usage  
The Energy Save option decreases picture brightness and lowers power consumption. The recommended setting,  
Energy Save Mode 1, extends the life of your panel while keeping power usage at a minimum.  
Follow the steps below to activate an Energy Save option.  
1 ) Access the Power Control through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Energy Save from the menu.  
3 ) Select an option from the Energy Save submenu.  
Option  
Description  
Off  
No effect  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
consumes less power than Off  
consumes less power than Mode 1  
4 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
4 Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment  
Options  
To take advantage of all that your flat panel TV offers, browse this chapter for features and functions that enhance  
your viewing experience. Most sections deal with adjusting the picture and arranging screen/menu items while  
the remaining sections provide sound and power management options. Apply as many or as few of these changes  
as desired.  
4.1 Choose an AV Option (Video, Game, etc.)  
Similar to the purpose for the room light sensor, the AV Option or Selection depends upon the brightness of the  
environment and the program or movie on screen. Images can be from either an AV Source or from a PC. Both  
sources are discussed below.  
Choose from among the seven AV Selections for the best image from an external AV Source. Use either the  
remote control or the Home Menu to select the AV source. For a PC, skip down to “4.1.3 Choose a PC Source.”  
If the AV source is a Game Control, select GAME and refer to “4.1.4 Set the Panel to Recognize a Game Console”  
for more information.  
4.1.1 AV Source through the Remote Control  
Follow the directions below to set an AV Selection for an external AV Source using the remote control.  
1 ) Press AV SELECTION on the remote control.  
The current AV selection appears.  
2 ) Press AV SELECTION again before the displayed mode disappears.  
Each press cycles the options in the order shown below.  
AV Selection  
Description  
OPTIMUM  
automatically adjusts the image quality for the  
brightness level of the viewing area (shared by  
external input and TV input sources)  
PERFORMANCE  
PURE  
for a highly defined image in a normally bright  
room (shared by external input and TV input  
sources)  
reflects input signals as faithfully as possible for  
checking image materials, for example (shared by  
external input and TV input sources)  
MOVIE  
SPORT  
GAME  
for movies (shared by external input and TV input  
sources)  
for sports programs (shared by external input and  
TV input sources)  
lowers image brightness for easier viewing (shared  
by external input and TV input sources)  
Standard  
allows customizing settings as desired (set the  
mode for each input source)  
3 ) Allow the AV Selection screen to disappear.  
When the screen disappears, the panel locks in last viewed option and the menu closes.  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
4.1.2 Choose an AV Source through the Home Menu  
The other method for choosing an AV Selection uses the Home Menu. Follow the directions below to set an AV  
Selection for an external AV Source.  
The AV Selection, OPTIMUM, automatically adjusts to the highest image quality possible for the selected source  
and viewing environment. Your flat panel TV employs advanced sound reproduction technologies, such as SRS  
WOW HDTM, OPTIMUM also automatically adjusts to the optimum sound for the selected scene. This process is  
gradual so changes to the tint and brightness may be visible. This is normal and is not a malfunction.  
To choose an AV source through the Home Menu, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Picture through the Setup.  
2 ) Select AV Selection from the Picture menu.  
3 ) Select an option from the submenu.  
AV Selection  
OPTIMUM  
When OPTIMUM is selected,  
PERFORMANCE  
images are adjusted automatically  
PURE  
based on the information collected  
at the Room Light Sensor, as well  
as the Color Sensor (when in use).  
MOVIE  
SPORT  
GAME  
Standard  
Picture  
AV Selection  
PureCinema  
Sound Control  
:
OPTIMUM  
Off  
:
OPTIMUM Performance  
Reset  
(Submenu when OPTIMUM is selected for AV Selection)  
4 ) Press HOME MENU to close and exit the menu.  
4.1.3 Choose a PC Source  
From a PC, choose between the two AV Selections for the best image. The options are as follows:  
• STANDARD: for a highly defined image in a normally bright room  
• USER: allows customizing settings as desired for each input source  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
4.1.4 Set the Panel to Recognize a Game Console  
When adding a game console to your flat panel TV, use the Game function to establish a preference for image  
quality or for operability.  
To have the panel store your Game preference, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Game Control Pref from the menu.  
3 ) Select On (operability preferred) or Off (image quality preferred).  
4 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
To activate the Game Control Pref option, set the AV Selection to GAME and use an external input (unless the  
source is coming from a PC). When a PC source menu is on screen, the Game Control Pref option is ignored.  
Also, the Game Control Pref option for operability (on) is ignored during multi-screen viewing (refer to “4.4 View  
in Multi-Screen”) or image freezing (refer to “4.5 Freeze the Picture”).  
4.2 Adjust Specific Picture Elements  
Plasma technology delivers one of the best images available today. However, the viewing area/environment and  
personal preferences affect how the picture appears. This section provides methods to adjust the picture and sound  
for your best viewing experience.  
4.2.1 Choose a Screen Size (Automatically or Manually)  
Automatic Screen Sizing  
The flat panel TV can automatically select an appropriate screen size for the incoming video signal from a  
connected HDMI device. To allow automatic screen sizing, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Auto Size from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select Natural or Wide-Zoom from the submenu.  
Option  
Description  
deactivates the Auto Size function  
adjusts the image to the screen size  
Off  
Natural  
Wide-Zoom  
enlarges and displays only the 4:3 aspect ratio  
portion in full and wide screen  
4 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Note: When a video signal contains no aspect ratio information, the Automatic Screen Size function is unavailable.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
Manual Screen Sizing  
Manually select an appropriate screen size if an image fails to appear in the correct format. Browse the menu for  
the correct screen size for a specific program.  
The selectable screen sizes differ depending on the types of input signals. While watching a TV broadcast, press  
SCREEN SIZE on the remote control to cycle the picture through Auto, FULL, Dot by Dot, ZOOM, CINEMA, 4:3,  
WIDE, WIDE 1 and WIDE 2. Freely change the screen size during broadcasts or video from other input sources.  
Auto is available when receiving HD broadcasts.  
The following chart provides information about how the screen appears for each option.  
AV Option  
Description  
Auto  
adds side masks or displays the image in full  
screen when detecting HD pictures containing side  
masks. See Detect Masks on page 62.  
FULL  
squeezes 16:9 images  
Dot by Dot  
ZOOM  
matches input signal to the same number of screen  
pixels (available for 1080i or 1080p signals only)  
bars may appear on the top and bottom on some  
programs that are 16:9 letterbox  
CINEMA  
bars may appear on the top and bottom on some  
programs that are 14:9 letterbox (available for SD  
signals only)  
4:3  
side bars appear on each side  
WIDE  
pictures progressively stretch toward each side  
(available for SD signals only)  
WIDE 1  
WIDE 2  
pictures progressively stretch toward each side  
(available for HD signals only)  
pictures evenly stretch toward each side (available  
for HD signals only)  
PC Option  
Description  
4:3  
fills without altering the input signal aspect ratio  
shows 16:9 screen display  
With WIDE 1 or WIDE 2 selected, a High Definition (HD) TV broadcast may crop part of an image or menu. If an  
image or menu appears cut or runs off the screen, change the option to FULL.  
Avoid showing signals that fill only part of the screen. Images that fail to fill the screen may cause temporary or  
permanent image retention depending on the frequency and duration. For example, an HD broadcast with side  
masks (4:3 content) causes uneven wear of the plasma cells. If side masks appear around a broadcast, after that  
program or movie is over, switch to a full screen motion video. This action helps the panel balance wear for the  
plasma cells and guard against after-image issues. For more information about Masks, refer to “4.3.1 Adjust for  
Screen Masking (black bars on sides).”  
Note: Not all broadcast programs carry alternative screen sizes.  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
4.2.2 Correct the Picture for an AV or PC Source  
Although picture adjustments are to your personal preferences, often the source causes unanticipated image  
changes. Your flat panel TV offers several adjustment options.  
AV Source  
Option  
Left Arrow  
less contrast  
Right Arrow  
more contrast  
Contrast  
Brightness dimmer  
brighter  
Color  
Tint  
decreased intensity  
purplish skin tones  
increased intensity  
greenish skin tones  
crisper definition  
Sharpness softer definition  
PC Source  
Option  
Left Arrow  
less contrast  
Right Arrow  
more contrast  
brighter  
Contrast  
Brightness dimmer  
Red  
weaker color  
stronger color  
stronger color  
stronger color  
Green  
Blue  
weaker color  
weaker color  
To correct the picture for an AV or a PC source, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Picture through the Setup.  
2 ) Select an option to adjust.  
AV Source  
PC Source  
Picture  
Picture  
AV Selection  
:
:
:
:
:
:
PERFORMANCE  
AV Selection  
:
:
:
:
:
:
STANDARD  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
40  
0
Contrast  
Brightness  
Red  
40  
0
0
0
Tint  
0
Green  
Blue  
0
Sharpness  
Pro Adjust  
Reset  
0
0
Reset  
3 ) Select the desired level for that option using the left/right arrows (/).  
32  
Contrast  
4 ) Repeat the process for any additional adjustments.  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu after all adjustments are complete.  
Note: Reset returns all settings to the factory defaults.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                       
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
4.3 Assign Advanced Picture Functions  
04  
Your flat panel TV provides various advanced functions for optimizing the picture quality that go beyond the basic  
adjustments explained earlier in this manual. This section explores the value offered through Pioneer’s Pro Adjust  
High Definition (HD) support, top quality blacks, better balanced whites, and overall color improvements.  
4.3.1 Adjust for Screen Masking (black bars on sides)  
Screen Masks fill areas on both sides of a picture. Some content fails to fill the screen so bars appear on each  
side of the picture. This section explains how to adjust screen masking.  
Detect Masks  
Some HD broadcasts transmit in 4:3 content with side masks. Side masks are black bars that appear on the  
picture’s left and right sides. If the flat panel TV’s Screen Size is set to Natural during the Auto Size process, gray  
bars replace the black bars. When the panel is set to Wide-Zoom, the bars are hidden. These responses reduce  
after-image concerns.  
To allow the panel to detect side masks, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Side Mask from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select Detection from the submenu.  
4 ) Select Mode 1 or Mode 2 to activate Side Mask Detection.  
Mode 1 detects only black side masks and Mode 2 detects both black and illustrated side masks. Select Off  
to deactivate this function.  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
6 ) Confirm that the word “AUTO” appears in the InfoBanner.  
Video signals can affect the Side Mask Detection function differently. For High Definition broadcasts, if Side Mask  
Detection is on, the panel automatically detects images containing side masks and shows the picture in full  
screen. Cycle the screen size to select Auto for video signals without aspect ratio information.  
Video content also can affect the Side Mask Detection function. If a detection error occurs when trying to watch  
HD content, manually change the screen size to the proper setting for the content.  
HD Wide Mode  
The HD Wide Mode allows selecting the display mode (WIDE 1 or WIDE 2) when detecting side masks that appear  
in a 4:3 image. This option is available when the Auto Size menu is set to Wide-Zoom and Side Mask Detection to  
Mode 1 or Mode 2. To allow the HD Wide Mode, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Side Mask from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select HD Wide Mode from the submenu.  
4 ) Select Mode 1 or Mode 2 to activate HD Wide Mode.  
• Mode 1: screen mode sets to WIDE 1 when detecting side masks.  
• Mode 2: screen mode sets to WIDE 2 when detecting side masks.  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
Lighten Side Masks  
If content appears with bars (side masks) on each side of a picture when the screen size is 4:3 and Side Mask  
Detection is set to Mode 1 or Mode 2, the bars automatically change from black to gray. However, the gray is fairly  
dark. To change the bars to a lighter shade of gray, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Side Mask from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select Brightness Sync. from the submenu.  
4 ) Select the desired parameter.  
Parameter  
Description  
Fixed  
Auto  
sets the same brightness for gray side masks  
adjusts the side mask brightness according to the  
brightness of screen images  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
4.3.2 Select a PureCinema Level for High Quality Image  
Pioneer’s PureCinema automatically detects and analyses a film-based source (originally encoded at 24 frames/  
second) then recreates each still film frame for HD picture quality. The function supports both film and text  
material.  
To set the PureCinema level for your HD material, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Picture through the Setup.  
With AV Selection set to OPTIMUM, go to Step 2.  
With AV Selection set to any options other than OPTIMUM, select Pro Adjust then go to Step 2.  
2 ) Select PureCinema from the submenu.  
3 ) Select Film Mode or Text Optimization depending on the material.  
4 ) Select the desired parameter.  
Mode  
Parameter  
Description  
Film Mode Off  
deactivates PureCinema  
automatically detects recorded  
Standard (not available for  
input signals 480p, 720p @60 image data when displaying  
Hz, or 1080p @60 Hz)  
DVD or high-definition images  
(e.g., movies) having 24 frames  
per second for smooth and vivid  
playback  
Smooth (not available for input produces smoother and more  
signals 1080p @60 Hz) vivid moving images  
Advance (not available for input converts theatre-quality images  
signals 1080p @60 Hz)  
to 72 Hz when displaying DVD  
images (e.g., movies) having 24  
frames per second for smooth  
and vivid playback  
Text  
Off  
deactivates text optimization  
Optimization On  
improves subtitle display  
quality  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Note: Activating the Game Control Pref setting under the Option menu disables the PureCinema setting.  
4.3.3 Select an Intelligent Mode Option  
Use this function to optimize color tones and brightness for images.  
To select the Intelligent Mode, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Picture through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Pro Adjust from the Picture menu.  
3 ) Select Intelligent Mode from the submenu.  
4 ) Select Mode 1 or Mode 2 (or Off).  
5 ) Select the desired parameter.  
Parameter  
Description  
Off  
No effect  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
compensates for more effective picture adjustment  
compensates for appropriate picture adjustment  
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Note: As this function automatically optimizes image quality, this process is gradual so changes to the tint and  
brightness may be visible. This is normal and is not a malfunction.  
4.3.4 Select the Picture Detail Options  
The Picture Detail function provides five adjustment options: DRE Picture, Black Level, ACL, Enhancer Mode and  
Gamma for enhanced image contrast, sharpness and image gradation characteristics.  
To select the Picture Detail options, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Picture through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Pro Adjust from the Picture menu.  
3 ) Select Picture Detail from the submenu.  
4 ) Select DRE Picture, Black Level, ACL, Enhancer Mode or Gamma.  
5 ) Select the desired parameter.  
Option  
Parameter  
Off  
Description  
DRE Picture (emphasizes  
image contrast between  
brightness and darkness)  
No effect  
High  
Mid  
enhances DRE picture  
standard DRE picture  
moderate DRE picture  
No effect  
Low  
Black Level (emphasizes dark Off  
portion of images for enhanced  
contrast)  
On  
activates Black Level  
ACL (compensates images for Off  
No effect  
optimum contrast  
characteristics)  
On  
activates ACL  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Enhancer Mode (selects  
processing of the image’s high  
frequency (detailed) area)  
1
selects Hard (SHARPNESS)  
image  
2
3
1
2
3
selects Natural (SHARPNESS)  
image  
selects Soft (SHARPNESS)  
image  
Gamma (adjusts the gamma  
characteristics)  
selects gamma  
characteristics 1  
selects gamma  
characteristics 2  
selects gamma  
characteristics 3  
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
4.3.5 Adjust the Color Temperature  
Adjust the Color Temperature for better white balance.  
To set the color temperature level, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Picture through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Pro Adjust from the Picture menu.  
3 ) Select Color Detail from the Pro Adjust menu.  
4 ) Select Color Temp from the submenu.  
5 ) Select the desired parameter.  
Parameter  
Description  
High  
white with bluish tone  
Mid-High  
Mid  
intermediate tone between High and Mid  
natural tone  
Mid-Low  
Low  
intermediate tone between Mid and Low  
white with reddish tone  
Manual  
adjusts to your preference  
To make fine adjustments, select Manual, press and hold ENTER for more than three seconds. The “Manual  
adjustment” screen appears. Go to Step 6.  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
6 ) Select the desired item.  
Item  
R High  
Left Arrow  
weaker red  
Right Arrow  
stronger red  
(fine adjustment for  
bright portions)  
G High  
B High  
R Low  
G Low  
B Low  
weaker green  
weaker blue  
stronger green  
stronger blue  
stronger red  
(fine adjustment for dark weaker red  
portions)  
weaker green  
stronger green  
stronger blue  
weaker blue  
To adjust another item, press RETURN then repeat Steps 5 and 6.  
7 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
4.3.6 Use CTI and Color Space  
Use the Color Transient Improvement (CTI) and Color Space options to further enhance the picture to your  
preference.  
To set the CTI and Color Space options, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Picture through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Pro Adjust from the Picture menu.  
3 ) Select Color Detail from the Pro Adjust menu.  
4 ) Select CTI or Color Space from the submenu.  
5 ) Select the desired parameter.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
CTI  
Off  
On  
1
No effect  
activates CTI  
Color Space  
optimized for vivid, vibrant color reproduction  
standard color reproduction  
2
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
4.3.7 Use the Color Management  
Use the Color Management option to fine adjust the coloring of images.  
To set the Color Management option, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Picture through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Pro Adjust from the Picture menu.  
3 ) Select Color Detail from the Pro Adjust menu.  
4 ) Select Color Management from the submenu.  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
5 ) Select the desired parameter.  
Color Management  
R
Y
G
C
B
M
0
0
0
0
0
0
6 ) Select the desired level.  
Item  
Left Arrow  
Right Arrow  
closer to yellow  
R
Y
closer to magenta  
closer to red  
closer to green  
closer to cyan  
closer to blue  
closer to magenta  
closer to red  
G
C
B
M
closer to yellow  
closer to green  
closer to cyan  
closer to blue  
To adjust another item, press RETURN then repeat Steps 5 and 6.  
7 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
4.3.8 Reduce Noise from the Image  
Use the video noise reduction features for clear and crisp images. Refer to the following table for available noise  
reduction functions.  
To select the Noise Reduction options, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Picture through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Pro Adjust from the Picture menu.  
3 ) Select Noise Reduction from the Pro Adjust menu.  
4 ) Select 3DNR, Field NR, Block NR or Mosquito NR.  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
5 ) Select the desired parameter.  
Option  
Parameter  
Off  
Description  
3DNR (3-dimensional Noise  
Reduction)  
No effect  
High  
Mid  
enhances DNR  
standard DNR  
moderate DNR  
No effect  
Low  
Field NR (removes glimmer for Off  
more natural image)  
High  
enhances Field NR  
standard Field NR  
moderate Field NR  
No effect  
Mid  
Low  
Block NR (reduces noise in HD Off  
images)  
On  
activates Block NR  
No effect  
Mosquito NR (reduces  
mosquito noise in DVD and HD  
images)  
Off  
On  
activates Mosquito NR  
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
4.3.9 Adjust Color Signals  
The 3DYC function optimizes characteristics for separating brightness signals and color signals while the I-P  
Mode provides optimum conversion from interlace signals to progressive signals. Use these options to adjust  
color signals for both video and still images.  
To select the 3DYC and I-P Mode options, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Picture through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Pro Adjust from the Picture menu.  
3 ) Select Others from the Pro Adjust menu.  
4 ) Select 3DYC or I-P Mode.  
5 ) Select the desired parameter.  
Option  
Parameter  
Off  
Description  
3DYC  
No effect  
High  
Mid  
Low  
1
enhances 3DYC  
standard 3DYC  
moderate 3DYC  
I-P Mode  
optimizes video images  
standard setting  
optimizes still images  
2
3
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Notes: 3DYC is available when connected to only the video terminal at INPUT 1, INPUT 2 or INPUT 3 or when  
analog tuner is selected.  
I-P Mode is unavailable when the selected mode is On for Game Control Pref or when input signal is 480p,  
720p or 1080p.  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
4.4 View in Multi-Screen  
04  
The flat panel TV can show multiple screens at the same time; two-screen or picture-in-picture. The pictures may  
be reversed (in 2-screen and P-in-P) or moved to various locations on the screen (P-in-P).  
Picture-in-Picture (P-in-P)  
2-Screen  
4.4.1 Split/Swap/Shift the Screen  
To split the screen so that two channels appear, press the SPLIT button on the remote control. Each press of the  
button cycles the screen through two-screen, picture-in-picture, and single-screen views.  
To switch the images between screen sides/locations, press the SWAP button.  
To move the Picture-In-Picture (P-in-P) small image counter-clockwise, press the SHIFT button.  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
.
TV  
Press SPLIT to cycle through the  
INPUT  
different multi-screen views.  
1
2
3
4
Press SWAP to switch the position  
of the two screens.  
Press SHIFT to move the position of  
the small screen counter-clockwise.  
TV/DTV  
5
6
7
AV  
SCREEN  
SIZE  
DISPLAY  
SELECTION  
PC  
SPLIT  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
SHIFT  
The multi-screen function is unavailable when viewing source from a single input or from two external input  
sources.  
Warning: Displaying pictures in multi-screen mode  
for an extended period may cause an after-image.  
To return to a single picture, press EXIT.  
Another option is to select a multi-screen mode from the TOOLS Menu. To select a multi-screen mode, follow the  
steps below.  
1 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select Split, Swap or Shift from the menu.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option (then press ENTER if you select Swap).  
3 ) Select a mode.  
Select Off, 2-screen or P-in-P for the Split mode. The selected mode is displayed in the center of the TOOLS  
Menu.  
4.5 Freeze the Picture  
During fast-action sequences or detailed pictures, try capturing the image with the FREEZE option. FREEZE  
allows you to better understand the action or picture details if desired. To freeze a picture from a TV broadcast or  
movie, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Press FREEZE to create a still image picture  
TV  
(copy) of the currently showing image.  
The copy appears to the right of the still-moving  
video sequence thus splitting the screen.  
INPUT  
1
5
2
6
3
4
2 ) Press FREEZE again to release the image.  
The frozen image disappears, returning the  
picture to a single screen with the video  
sequence still in progress.  
TV/DTV  
7
AV  
SCREEN  
SIZE  
DISPLAY  
SELECTION  
PC  
SPLIT  
FREEZE  
• With the screen split, an image cannot be frozen.  
A warning message appears if you attempt to  
use this function when there is already a frozen  
SWAP  
SHIFT  
image on screen. If an image is left frozen on the screen, the panel automatically releases the image after  
five minutes.  
Note: Using FREEZE for an extended period may cause an after-image.  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
4.6 Use the Banner Feature  
04  
When tuning in a TV channel or an input signal  
changes, any available information appears on  
the screen if the signal carries information  
about the program (see InfoBanner below).  
Pressing DISPLAY causes the InfoBanner  
(additional) to appear. Press EXIT or DISPLAY  
again to hide the banner.  
InfoBanner  
D00001.000 ABCDEFGH  
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
STEREO  
9:30AM  
1
2
3
4
5
6
InfoBanner (additional)  
D00001.000  
ABCDE  
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
7:07PM-8:08PM  
STEREO  
PRT_10  
9:30AM  
TV  
PG  
V
HD  
7
8
91011 12  
1 -Broadcast signal (Digital/Analog) 7 -Program time schedule  
2 -Channel number  
3 -Station name  
8 -Parental Control information  
9 -Parental icon  
4 -Program title  
10 -Parental name  
5 -Sound multiplex information  
6 -Current time  
11 -Signal information (HD/SD)  
12 -Favorite icon  
A separate banner also appears at the bottom of the screen showing the AV Selection mode (bottom left) and  
screen size (bottom right).  
The above information is only appears if it is included in the broadcast signal. During multi-screen mode, the  
banner appears in both main and sub screens.  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
4.7 Select Alternatives for/to Sound  
04  
There are four sound alternatives for your flat panel TV; CC, MTS, SAP, and Sound Effect. This section defines each  
of these alternatives then explains how/when to use.  
4.7.1 Activate Closed Captioning (CC)  
Your flat panel TV is equipped with an internal closed caption (CC) decoder. CC allows conversations, narration,  
and sound effects in TV programs and home videos to appear as subtitles on the screen. For digital channels,  
some parameters can be changed such as the text font and color. However, not all programs/videos offer closed  
caption. Please look for the “ “ symbol to confirm that the channel or program provides closed captioning.  
To activate closed captioning when available, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Closed Captions from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select Status from the submenu.  
4 ) Select an option.  
Parameter  
Description  
Off  
On  
does not show closed captioning (default)  
shows closed captioning when available  
shows closed captions only while sound is muted  
On If Mute  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Types of Closed Caption  
Broadcast TV offers different types of closed captioning. Your flat panel TV provides support for the recognized  
types on Analog programming as well as Digital signals that carry analog closed captions.  
• CC 1, CC 2, CC 3, or CC 4: provides subtitles with a full view of the picture  
• Text 1, Text 2, Text 3, or Text 4: superimposes other information (e.g. weather) that is independent of the TV  
program in progress  
To change the closed caption type from the default CC 1, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Closed Captions from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select Analog Settings from the submenu.  
4 ) Select the desired closed caption.  
Status  
:
:
Off  
Analog Settings  
Digital Settings  
CC 1  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
Closed Caption for Digital Programs  
There are six different closed caption options for digital programming, called Service levels. The Primary Caption  
Service is on Service 1 and the Secondary Language Service is on Service 2. More information about these  
offerings is found later in this chapter.  
To change the digital closed caption from the default Service 1, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Closed Captions from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select Digital Settings from the submenu.  
4 ) Select Digital Service.  
5 ) Select the desired closed caption service level (/).  
Digital Settings  
Digital Service  
Font Size  
:
:
:
:
:
:
Service 1  
Auto  
Font  
Auto  
Font Color  
Auto  
Font Opacity  
Background Color  
Auto  
Auto  
Background Opacity :  
Auto  
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
To change the appearance of closed captioning on a digital program, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Closed Captions from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select Digital Settings from the submenu.  
4 ) Select an option to change.  
5 ) Select the desired parameter for that option.  
The default parameter for each option is Auto.  
Option  
Description  
Font Size  
Auto, Large, Standard, Small  
1
Font  
Auto, Font 1, Font 2, Font 3, Font 4, Font 5, Font 6,  
Font 7  
Font Color  
Auto, Black, White, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow,  
Magenta, Cyan  
Font Opacity  
Auto, Solid, Transparent, Translucent, Flashing  
Background Color  
Auto, Black, White, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow,  
Magenta, Cyan  
Background Opacity  
Auto, Solid, Transparent, Translucent  
1
Font 1 (monospaced with serifs)/ Font 2 (proportionally spaced with serifs)/ Font 3 (monospaced  
without serifs)/ Font 4 (proportionally spaced without serifs)/ Font 5 (casual font)/ Font 6 (cursive font)/  
Font 7 (small capitals font)  
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
4.7.2 Switch Languages Using MTS  
Multi-channel Television Sound (MTS) allows switching the audible  
language if it is available for that program. Available languages differ  
depending on the current broadcast.  
When watching a digital TV program that provides multi language  
services, follow the steps below.  
EXIT  
TOOLS  
SAT GUIDE  
DVD  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
1 ) Press TOOLS on the remote control.  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select MTS from the TOOLS Menu.  
3 ) Select English, Français or Español.  
SAT / DVD MENU  
A digital TV program without sound or language information causes “N/  
A” to appear on the screen. For languages other than English, French, or  
Spanish, the word “Others” appears instead. If the selected language is  
available when the channel or program is changed, that language is  
heard.  
4.7.3 Select SAP  
When watching TV programs on the VHF/UHF frequencies or from analog cable TV channels, the TOOLS button  
can activate Stereo Sound and/or Secondary Audio Programs (SAP) if available.  
To select Stereo/SAP options, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select MTS from the TOOLS Menu.  
3 ) Select STEREO, SAP or MONO.  
The chart below breaks down the Stereo/SAP options.  
STEREO mode  
SAP mode  
MONO mode  
STEREO  
SAP  
MONO  
STEREO mode  
SAP mode  
MONO mode  
STEREO  
SAP  
MONO  
STEREO  
9:30AM  
STEREO (SAP) 9:30AM  
MONO (SAP) 9:30AM  
MONO  
9:30AM  
In STEREO mode  
In STEREO mode  
In STEREO mode  
In STEREO mode  
STEREO  
9:30AM  
SAP (STEREO)  
9:30AM  
SAP (MAIN) 9:30AM  
MAIN  
9:30AM  
In SAP mode  
In SAP mode  
In SAP mode  
In SAP mode  
MONO  
9:30AM  
MONO (SAP) 9:30AM  
MONO (SAP)  
9:30AM  
MONO  
9:30AM  
In MONO mode  
In MONO mode  
In MONO mode  
In MONO mode  
STEREO signals  
STEREO + SAP  
MONO + SAP  
MONO signals  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
When stereo sound is difficult to hear, manually switch to MONO for clearer sound. The panel’s sound remains  
in mono even if the system receives a stereo broadcast. Reselect STEREO to hear broadcasts in stereo where  
available.  
Selecting MTS while the input source is INPUT 1 to INPUT 7 or a PC does not change the type of sound. In this  
case, the video source determines the sound.  
4.7.4 Apply Sound Effect Settings  
Your flat panel TV offers four sound effects: SRS FOCUS, SRS, SRS TruBass and SRS Definition.  
• SRS FOCUSTM moves sound source direction vertically and makes sound and voice clearly audible  
®
• SRS effortlessly produces a three-dimensional sound field  
®
• SRS TruBass produces a clear, rich bass tone  
®
• SRS Definition improves midrange quality and clarifies voice and instrument sound  
To activate one or more of the sound effects, follow the directions below.  
1 ) Access the Sound through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Sound Effect from the Sound menu.  
3 ) Select a sound effect option.  
(SRS FOCUS, SRS, SRS TruBass, SRS Definition)  
4 ) Select Low (moderate), Mid (standard), High (enhanced) or Off for that option.  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Note: How a Sound Effect changes the Audio depends on the signal.  
(SRS WOW HDTM) indicates that SRS FOCUS, SRS, SRS TruBass and SRS Definition are on.  
4.7.5 Use Auto Volume Control (AVC)  
Auto Volume Control, or AVC, reduces sudden volume change and compensates source sound level.  
To select this option, follow the procedure below.  
1 ) Access the Sound through the Setup.  
2 ) Select AVC from the Sound menu.  
3 ) Select On (or Off ).  
4 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
4.8 Manage the Power  
04  
Your flat panel TV is energy efficient but includes functions to save additional power. In an earlier section entitled  
“3.6 Smart Starts for New Owners”, you were told how to activate the Energy Save feature. This section provides  
more advanced functions to save power and to extend the panel life.  
AV/PC Source - Picture Off  
To save energy and extend the life of your flat panel TV, have the screen turn Off. To deactivate the screen, follow  
the steps below.  
1 ) Press TOOLS on the remote control.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select Picture Off from the TOOLS Menu.  
3 ) Press ENTER.  
The screen display turns Off.  
To restore the screen display, press any buttons other than VOL +/and MUTING.  
Note: The Picture Off setting is not memorized by the system.  
AV Source - No Signal  
To save energy and extend the life of your flat panel TV, the panel can enter Standby automatically if the AV source  
signal fails for 15 consecutive minutes. At five minutes before and at every minute after that, a warning message  
appears on the screen. When the final minute elapses, the panel switches to Standby.  
To have the panel switch to Standby when an AV source signal fails, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Power Control through the Setup.  
2 ) Select No Signal off from the Power Control menu.  
3 ) Select Enable to activate the AV Signal off power function.  
4 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Note: The flat panel TV may switch to Standby when there is noise (signal interference) at the end of a broadcast  
schedule (channel goes off-air).  
AV Source - Non-Operational  
To save energy and extend the life of your flat panel TV, the panel can enter Standby automatically if there are no  
commands from the AV source for three consecutive hours. At five minutes before and at every minute after that,  
a warning message appears on the screen. When the final minute elapses, the panel switches to Standby.  
To have the panel enter Standby automatically when there are no commands from the AV source, follow the steps  
below.  
1 ) Access the Power Control through the Setup.  
2 ) Select No Operation off from the Power Control menu.  
3 ) Select Enable from the No Operation off menu.  
4 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Additional Picture and Sound Adjustment Options  
04  
PC Source -Power Management  
When receiving signals from a PC, the panel can automatically enter Standby if the signal fails. Follow the steps  
below to activate this function.  
1 ) Access the Power Control through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Power Management from the Power Control menu.  
3 ) Select an option from the submenu.  
Option  
Description  
Off  
On  
no power management (default)  
panel enters Standby when no signal is received  
from the PC for eight minutes; using the PC has no  
effect on the panel  
Note: Pressing the remote’s TV () or the panel’s STANDBY/ON reactivates the flat panel TV.  
4 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
These power management options are unavailable when a PC is connected to the panel through the HDMI port/  
terminal.  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
5 Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel  
TV  
Although earlier sections have mentioned other equipment for playing back video, this section provides control  
and operation information for specific types of equipment.  
5.1 Program the Remote Control to Operate Other Equipment  
To operate other equipment or devices through your flat panel TV, program the panel’s remote control with the  
equipment’s Learning function or manufacturing code. A manufacturing code is a series of numbers that identify  
the type of device and the brand. These codes are available in the section entitled “8.2 Manufacturer Codes to  
Program into the Remote Control” in Appendix 8.2 of this manual.  
5.1.1 Use the Learning Feature  
The Learning function allows the panel’s remote control to memorize other remote controls’ codes.  
2 cm to 5 cm (0.8 inches to 2.0 inches)  
Remote control of  
AV product  
Remote control  
(Supplied accessory)  
To activate the Learning function follow the directions below.  
1 ) Press SELECT to choose the device to learn.  
1
4
7
2
5
3
6
9
2 ) Press EDIT/LEARN and 2 at the same time.  
The selected mode indicator flashes when the remote control is  
ready to be learned.  
8
RECEIVER  
VOL  
3 ) Use the number buttons to learn a manufacturing code.  
The mode indicator lights up.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
EDIT/LEARN  
TV CBL  
DVD  
The Learn session is canceled in 30 seconds and the indicator  
restarts blinking again. When the indicator flashes, the selected  
device’s remote is memorized. To exit the Learn mode before it  
finishes, press EDIT/LEARN.  
RCV SAT VCR DVR  
4 ) Press EDIT/LEARN again to exit the Lean mode.–  
Note: The Learn session is canceled:  
– if no operation is performed for more than one minute after  
having pressed EDIT/LEARN and 2 (the mode indicator is  
flashing)  
– if you press SELECT  
– Code transmission finishes in approximately two seconds. Do not interrupt it until the transmission is  
complete. Wait until the mode indicator flashes again. When using any of the receiver buttons (, INPUT,  
or VOL+/–), the learned manufacturer code remains the same.  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
To delete a learned code, overwrite it with a new code on the same button or follow the directions below.  
The selected mode indicator flashes when the remote control is ready to be learned.  
2 ) Press and hold TVfor more than two seconds.  
The remote control starts deleting all learned codes for selected modes. When completed, the mode  
indicator blinks Off and the remote control returns to normal operation.  
5.1.2 Assign a Manufacturing Code to the Remote Control  
1
4
7
2
5
3
6
9
To assign a preset Manufacturing code to the panel’s remote control,  
follow the directions below. (For Manufacturing codes, refer to “8.2  
Manufacturer Codes to Program into the Remote Control.”)  
8
RECEIVER  
1 ) Press SELECT to choose the device to program.  
VOL  
INPUT  
2 ) Press EDIT and 1 at the same time.  
SELECT  
EDIT/LEARN  
TV CBL  
DVD  
The selected mode indicator flashes when the remote control is  
ready to be programmed.  
RCV SAT VCR DVR  
3 ) Use the number buttons to enter a manufacturer code.  
When the indicator turns off, the code has been programmed into  
the remote control.  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
5.1.3 Issue a Library Search for a Manufacturer Code  
If the code for a particular device is unknown, cycle through the  
available codes for a similar unit then sample some functions for that  
code.  
SPLIT  
SHIFT  
1
2
3
TOP MENU  
To find the code that properly operates the unit, follow the steps below  
using differemt codes to find the best match.  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
1 ) Press SELECT to choose the device to program.  
2 ) Press EDIT and 3 at the same time.  
SAT / DVD MENU  
The selected mode indicator flashes when the remote control is  
ready to search the code library.  
HDMI  
CTRL  
3 ) Sample the code using a SOURCE POWER, PLAY, 1 or CH+  
command.  
SOURCE  
STOP  
REC  
HMG  
4 ) Use the up/down arrow (/) buttons to advance to the next code  
if the code fails to control the device.  
RECEIVER  
VOL  
INPUT  
Another option is to return to the previous code and repeat Step 3.  
SELECT  
EDIT/LEARN  
TV CBL  
DVD  
RCV SAT VCR DVR  
5 ) Press ENTER to lock in the code that properly operates the device.  
All the available buttons for the selected mode are added when  
the mode indicator flashes on for one second. The remote control  
then returns to normal operation.  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
5.1.4 Clear Added Manufacturer Codes from the Remote Control  
To return all learned and preset codes to the defaults (PIONEER), follow the steps below.  
1 ) Press EDIT and TV at the same time.  
Selection can be in any mode.  
TV  
2 ) Press the Yellow button.  
INPUT  
Confirm that the selected mode indicator flashes.  
1
2
3
7
4
The remote control enters the Manufacturing Reset mode. The  
reset is complete when the mode indicator flashes on for one  
second. The remote control then returns to normal operation.  
TV/DTV  
5
6
AV  
SCREEN  
SIZE  
DISPLAY  
SELECTION  
PC  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
Note: The panel’s remote control may not control or have complete  
control of some equipment listed in the tables.  
SAT / DVD MENU  
HDMI  
CTRL  
SOURCE  
STOP  
REC  
HMG  
RECEIVER  
VOL  
INPUT  
SELECT  
EDIT/LEARN  
TV CBL  
DVD  
RCV SAT VCR DVR  
To exit before the reset is complete, press the EDIT button again. The reset is cancelled if no action is taken within  
60 seconds. Also, switching the Mode during this procedure cancels the reset.  
5.1.5 Control a Pioneer Receiver  
The flat panel TV’s remote control has a bank of buttons specifically for controlling a Pioneer receiver. The active  
buttons, left to right, are as follows:  
• RECEIVER STANDBY/ON  
(turns the Pioneer Receiver On/Off)  
HDMI  
CTRL  
• RECEIVER INPUT  
SOURCE  
STOP  
REC  
(cycles through/selects an input)  
HMG  
• RECEIVER VOL –  
RECEIVER  
VOL  
(adjusts the volume lower)  
INPUT  
• RECEIVER VOL +  
SELECT  
EDIT/LEARN  
TV CBL  
DVD  
(adjusts the volume higher)  
RCV SAT VCR DVR  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
5.1.6 Control a Cable (CBL) or Satellite (SAT) System  
When Mode is set to CBL/SAT, a cable converter uses the buttons 1, 6, 7, 8, and 9 while satellite tuners use the  
buttons 1 to 8. However, the panel only recognizes a single system (cable or satellite) at a time.  
1
Number buttons  
(press to enter a channel number)  
SAT GUIDE  
(displays the satellite broadcasting guide screen)  
ENTER  
TV  
2
INPUT  
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
3
TV/DTV  
(Enter activates the selected function)  
(arrows to select from SAT GUIDE or MENU  
screens)  
AV  
SCREEN  
SIZE  
DISPLAY  
SELECTION  
PC  
SPLIT  
FREEZE  
4
SAT MENU  
(displays the satellite broadcasting menu screen)  
SOURCE  
(turns the equipment power on and off)  
CH ENTER*  
SWAP  
SHIFT  
5
1
2
3
6
6
4
7
5
8
0
1
2
(enters the selected channel with the direct  
channel selection buttons)  
9
7
CH RETURN*  
(press buttons that correspond to a channel)  
CH +/–  
(selects a higher or lower channel)  
RETURN  
(restores the immediately previous screen)  
CH  
ENTER  
6
7
8
CH RETURN  
VOL  
CH  
8
MUTING  
9
EXIT  
TOOLS  
SAT GUIDE  
* Some cable converter manufacturers do not preset  
CH ENTER and CH RETURN.  
DVD  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
3
4
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
9
SAT / DVD MENU  
HDMI  
CTRL  
SOURCE  
STOP  
REC  
HMG  
5
RECEIVER  
VOL  
INPUT  
SELECT  
EDIT/LEARN  
TV CBL  
DVD  
RCV SAT VCR DVR  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
5.1.7 Control a Video Cassette Recorder (VCR)  
When Mode is set to VCR, verify that the proper Input is selected (INPUT 1 to INPUT 7) then use 1 to 8 to control  
the device.  
7
8
0
9
1
REWind  
(rewinds the VCR tape and allows searches)  
PAUSE/STILL  
(pauses playback and displays still images)  
SOURCE  
(turns the VCR’s power on and off)  
CH +/–  
(selects a higher or lower channel)  
PLAY  
(selects playback)  
FF  
(advances the VCR tape and allows searches)  
STOP  
(halts VCR tape transport)  
RECord  
(begins recording)  
CH  
ENTER  
2
CH RETURN  
3
VOL  
CH  
4
MUTING  
4
EXIT  
TOOLS  
SAT GUIDE  
5
DVD  
TOP MENU  
6
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
7
RETURN  
SAT / DVD MENU  
8
5
6
7
8
HDMI  
CTRL  
1
SOURCE  
STOP  
REC  
2
3
HMG  
RECEIVER  
VOL  
INPUT  
SELECT  
EDIT/LEARN  
TV CBL  
DVD  
RCV SAT VCR DVR  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
5.1.8 Control a DVD Player/DVR Recorder/BD Player  
When Mode is set to DVD/DVR, the remote control can operate DVD players, DVD recorders or BD players  
connected to the flat panel TV. Verify that the proper Input is selected for the device then use 1 to 14 to control it.  
Note: Equipment from other manufacturers (DVD players, DVD recorders, BD players, and HD-DVD players) can  
also be operated using the remote control if the remote is preset for the device(s).  
7
8
0
9
1
DVD TOP MENU  
(displays the top menu on the DVD)  
ENTER  
CH  
ENTER  
2
(ENTER activates the selected function)  
(arrows to select from SAT GUIDE or MENU  
screens)  
CH RETURN  
VOL  
CH  
8
9
MUTING  
3
DVD MENU  
(displays the DVD menu)  
Red/Green/Blue/Yellow (BD only)  
(controls a BD-J application)  
REVERSE SCAN/CHAPTER SEARCH  
EXIT  
TOOLS  
SAT GUIDE  
4
1
2
DVD  
TOP MENU  
5
ENTER  
(press once quickly to go to beginning of current  
chapter; press again to go back to the beginning of  
the previous chapter; continue pressing to go  
backward)  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
3
4
10  
11  
SAT / DVD MENU  
6
PAUSE/STILL  
(pauses playback and displays still image)  
SOURCE  
(turns the equipment power on or off)  
CH +/– (DVD Recorder only)  
(selects a higher or lower channel)  
TOOLS  
HDMI  
CTRL  
5
6
7
7
12  
13  
14  
SOURCE  
STOP  
REC  
HMG  
8
RECEIVER  
VOL  
INPUT  
9
SELECT  
EDIT/LEARN  
TV CBL  
DVD  
(assigns the code for a Pioneer BD player)  
RCV SAT VCR DVR  
10 RETURN  
(restores the immediately previous screen)  
11 PLAY  
(selects playback)  
12 FORWARD SCAN/CHAPTER SEARCH  
(press once quickly to go to beginning of next  
chapter; press again to advance to beginning of  
next chapter; continue pressing for fast forward)  
13 STOP  
(halts DVD playback, some DVD players/recorders  
open the disc tray if this button is pressed twice)  
14 RECord (DVD Recorder only)  
(begins recording)  
13  
&
14 STOP RECord (DVD Recorder only)  
(press and hold then press to stop recording -  
applies to Pioneer DVD recorders only)  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
5.2 Use HDMI Inputs  
05  
High Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) is a communication method commonly used by digital and/or  
high definition equipment. Your flat panel TV’s INPUT 4, INPUT 5, INPUT 6, INPUT 7 are HDMI terminals for  
incoming digital video and audio signals. The flat panel TV supports HDMI Control functions so that when a piece  
of equipment is connected to the panel, it can control the equipment. To use an HDMI terminal, specify the types  
of video and audio signals being sent from the connected equipment. For the signal types, see the operating  
manual(s) that came with the equipment.  
One of the benefits of using your flat panel TV to control other equipment is the support of Deep Color. Deep Color is  
the color depth that describes the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image.  
Besides the conventional RGB/YCbCr16bit/20bit/24bit signals, the flat panel TV also supports RGB/YCbCr30bit/36bit  
signals. This enables finer color reproduction when a device that supports Deep Color signals (HDMI1.3 Deep Color)  
is connected to the panel. The color depth appears on the InfoBanner if a program supports Deep Color.  
The flat panel TV supports the following Video signals:  
Supported Video Signals  
• 1920 x 1080p@60 Hz  
Supported PC Signals  
• 1280 x 1024 (SXGA) 60 Hz  
• 1360 x 768 (Wide - XGA) 60 Hz  
• 1024 x 768 (XGA) 60 Hz  
• 800 x 600 (SVGA) 60 Hz  
• 640 x 480 (VGA) 60 Hz  
• 1920 x 1080p@24 Hz  
• 1920 x 1080i@59.94 Hz/60 Hz  
• 1280 x 720p@59.94 Hz/60 Hz  
• 720 x 480p@59.94 Hz/60 Hz  
• 720 (1440) x 480i@59.94 Hz/60 Hz  
Note: It may take a short period for the image to appear on the other equipment, depending on the type of device.  
The flat panel TV supports the following Audio signals:  
• Linear PCM (STEREO 2ch)  
• Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
When connecting a PC to one of the panel’s HDMI inputs, use an HDMI-compliant PC or video card. Using DVI  
output from the PC to the flat panel TV may cause the sound or picture to fail or seem distorted. If a DVI output is  
your only option then contact the PC manufacturer for assistance.  
5.2.1 Specify the HDMI Input Type  
To select a signal type, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Select the Input for the connected equipment.  
Press the INPUT button (remote control or panel) until the correct input is showing (INPUT 4, INPUT 5,  
INPUT 6, or INPUT 7).  
Note: For INPUT 4 and INPUT 5, add Audio cables to support analog signals.  
2 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
3 ) Select HDMI Input from the Option menu.  
4 ) Select Signal Type from the submenu.  
5 ) Select the appropriate option.  
Option  
Description  
Video  
PC  
use except when a PC is connected (default)  
when a PC is connected to HDMI input terminal  
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
In Video mode, the image is over-scanned (enlarged) but the panel automatically switches to PC when receiving  
computer signals. In PC mode, the image displays in full size for optimum image quality.  
Video (over-scan)  
PC (under-scan)  
5.2.2 Specify a Digital HDMI Signal Type  
For the necessary digital video signal type, check the operating manual that came with the other equipment.  
To assign the type of digital signal, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select HDMI Input from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select Video from the submenu.  
4 ) Select the type of digital video signal recommended for the attached device.  
Type  
Description  
Auto  
automatically identifies input digital signals  
(default)  
Color-1  
Color-2  
Color-3  
Color-4  
Digital Component Video signals (4:2:2) locked  
Digital Component Video signals (4:4:4) locked  
Digital RGB signals (16 to 235) locked  
Digital RGB signals (0 to 255) locked  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
If an image fails to appear, specify another digital video signal type. Type parameters other than Auto need to be  
checked for natural colorings.  
5.2.3 Specify an Audio HDMI Signal Type  
For the necessary audio signal type, check the operating manual that came with the other equipment. When  
using INPUT 4 or INPUT 5 for HDMI, select the terminal for the desired input source.  
To specify the audio type, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select HDMI Input from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select Audio from the submenu.  
4 ) Select the type of audio signal recommended for the attached device.  
Type  
Description  
Auto  
automatically identifies input audio signals (default)  
accepts digital audio signals  
Digital  
Analog  
accepts analog audio signals  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
If there is no sound, specify another audio signal type. Depending on the type of equipment, sound output may  
require analog audio cables in addition to the HDMI connection(s).  
Note: When signals come through the HDMI terminals, no signals are output from the DIGITAL OUT terminal if they  
are copy guarded.  
5.3 Control Equipment with the Panel’s Remote Through HDMI  
Your flat panel TV’s remote can control other equipment such as a recorder, player, or AV system through the HDMI  
Control functions. The HDMI Control functions include playback of content using an on-screen control panel.  
However, not all device operations may be available through HDMI control. For details, see the charts below.  
Controlled  
Control Function  
Function Description  
Equipment  
Recorder  
Player  
Playback of  
content  
Pressing PLAY on a connected device  
automatically selects the source and  
begins playback  
On-screen control Recorder  
Player  
Recorder/player operation can be  
controlled on-screen or with the  
panel’s remote (play, stop, fast  
forward/reverse, etc.)  
Display Language Recorder  
Information on the display menu  
Setup  
Player  
language transfers to the recorder or  
player connected to the flat panel TV.  
For details, see the operation manual  
that came with the recorder or player.  
AV system control AV system  
Receiver/amplifier operation can also  
be controlled with the panel’s remote,  
(volume, surround mode and input  
selection of the HDMI terminal)  
Power ON  
Power OFF  
Recorder  
Player  
The flat panel TV can be turned On  
when a connected recorder(s) or  
player(s) is turned On and images are  
input to the flat panel TV  
Recorder  
Player  
AV system  
The connected device(s) can be  
turned Off when the flat panel TV is  
turned Off  
Notes: The KURO LINK function name used on the web and in catalogs is referred to as HDMI Control in the  
operating instructions and on the product.  
Except for Power Off and Display Language Setup functions, only a single HDMI terminal may be active  
at a time.  
The flat panel TV’s remote can control a maximum of two (2) recorders, two (2) playback devices, and one (1) AV  
system at a time.  
To select and use the various HDMI Control functions for a connected Pioneer AV system, recorder, or player, use  
the panel’s HDMI Control menu.  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
To access the menu, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Press HOME MENU.  
2 ) Select HDMI Control from the main menu.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option then press ENTER.  
Disc Navigator  
CTRL Panel(AV-SYS)  
Playback CTRL Panel  
Switch to AV Sound  
Note: Pressing HDMI CTRL on the remote also causes the HDMI Control menu to open.  
Option  
Description  
Disc Navigator  
displays a title list of connected recorder or player  
displays the control panel for connected AV system  
CTRL Panel (AV-SYS)  
Playback CTRL Panel  
displays the control panel for connected recorder  
or player  
Switch to AV Sound/  
Switch to TV Sound  
switches between the flat panel TV screen and the  
connected AV system for sound output  
Use the following buttons to control functions such as the disc  
navigator on a recorder or player.  
1
2
1
VOL +/–  
(adjusts the volume for an AV system)  
2
5
6
MUTING  
(turns off the sound while the video continues to play)  
3
Arrow buttons  
(navigates the menu screen)  
3
4
4
Color buttons (Red, Green, Blue, Yellow)  
(controls a BD player)  
7
5
TOOLS  
(assigns the code for a Pioneer BD player)  
6
ENTER  
(activates the selected function)  
7
RETURN  
(returns to the previous menu screen)  
To connect a device for HDMI Control, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Turn on the flat panel TV and all other equipment.  
2 ) Confirm that the panel’s Input Setting for HDMI Control Setting options comply with directions in the  
operating instructions for the connected device(s).  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
3 ) Confirm that the other equipment is set for HDMI Control.  
4 ) Check that the audio and video are playing back properly from the equipment connected to the HDMI  
terminal(s).  
5 ) Turn Off the flat panel TV.  
6 ) Pause for a few seconds before turning the power back on.  
7 ) Verify that all equipment is functioning properly.  
To select the device to control via HDMI Control, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select HDMI Control Setting from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select Input Setting from the submenu.  
Input Setting  
:
:
:
:
INPUT 4  
On  
Power Off Control  
Power-On Ready  
Hold Sound Status  
On  
Off  
Power On Test  
Power Off Test  
4 ) Select the desired Input (INPUT 4, INPUT 5, INPUT 6, or INPUT 7).  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
If operating an HDMI supported device using an HDMI port other than the terminal selected in Input Setting, the  
system malfunctions. When connecting to an HDMI terminal other than that selected in Input Setting, the  
equipment settings should block HDMI Control functions. The HDMI Control menu is not selectable when the  
option Input Setting under the HDMI Control Setting menu is set to Off.  
The control menu changes to suit the type of HDMI-compatible equipment. When adding, changing, or removing  
equipment from HDMI Control, refer to the sections below for installation notes and the supported commands.  
5.3.1 Control an AV System  
When adding an AV System, connect the unit between the panel and any recorders and/or players. To function  
properly, an Audio/Video system should support the HDMI Control functions between the panel and any other  
connected equipment.  
If the AV system does not support HDMI Control but the other equipment (player/recorder) accepts this type of  
control than connect the AV System through the panel’s DIGITAL OUT using an optical digital cable and AUDIO  
OUT using an AV cable (commercially available). The other equipment connects to the HDMI port using an HDMI  
compliant cable. Signals input from the HDMI are not output from DIGITAL OUT.  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
During playback, use the remote control’s up/down arrows (/ ) to cycle through the surround sound options.  
Use the left/right arrows (/ ) to change the input. To resume playback, return to the HDMI Control menu then  
select the function again.  
AV Systems  
HDMI Control  
1 Cycles the surround mode in sequence  
****  
5
6
2 Switches the input source in reverse order  
3 Switches the surround mode in reverse order  
4 Closes the screen to return to HDMI Control  
menu  
5 Lists the connected equipment  
(model number)  
SURROUND+  
1
INPUT-  
INPUT+  
2
3
7
SURROUND-  
Exit  
6 Switches the input source in sequence  
7 Reserved/Void  
4
5.3.2 Control a Recorder  
Press ENTER to start playback or press HDMI CONTROL to return to the menu. This process also applies to  
Players. Refer to the chart below for available commands.  
Recorders  
HDMI Control  
1 Skips commercials  
2 Fast reverse  
3 Stops playback  
****  
5
1
6
4 Closes the screen to return to HDMI Control  
menu  
5 Lists the connected equipment  
(model number)  
2
3
7
Exit  
6 Fast forward  
7 Starts playback  
4
Note: You can also use (Play), (Stop), (Pause), (Fast Forward) and (Fast Reverse) on the remote  
control to conduct the same operations as the control menu buttons.  
5.3.3 Control a Player  
Press ENTER to start playback or press HDMI CONTROL to return to the menu. This process also applies to  
Recorders. Refer to the chart below for available commands.  
Players  
HDMI Control  
1 Displays the DVD/Blu-ray disc menu on the  
5
****  
player  
2 Fast reverse  
3 Stops playback  
MENU  
1
6
4 Closes the screen to return to HDMI Control  
menu  
5 Lists the connected equipment  
(model number)  
2
3
7
Exit  
6 Fast forward  
4
7 Starts playback  
Note: You can also use (Play), (Stop), (Pause), (Fast Forward) and (Fast Reverse) on the remote  
control to conduct the same operations as the control menu buttons.  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
5.3.4 Add an AV Amp or a BD Player  
To add an AV amp and/or a BD Player, refer to the appropriate cabling diagram below.  
AV Amp & BD Player  
T
T
T
T
W
W
W
W
Rear view  
Rear view  
AV cable  
HDMI compliant  
cable (HDMI cable  
having the HDMI  
mark)  
Optical digital  
cable  
(commercially  
available)  
AV cable  
(commercially  
available)  
(commercially  
available)  
HDMI compliant  
cable (HDMI cable  
having the HDMI  
mark)  
Optical digital cable  
(commercially  
available)  
BD player  
AV amp  
AV amp  
BD player  
BD Player only  
T
T
W
W
Rear view  
HDMI compliant cable  
(HDMI cable having the  
HDMI mark)  
BD player  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
5.4 Specific HDMI Control Commands  
05  
When using HDMI equipment with your flat panel TV, some options include when to power the panel and ways to  
turn other devices or features On and Off. This section provides steps for commonly desirable setting changes.  
5.4.1 Play Source Sound Using an HDMI Command  
When sound is coming from a Pioneer AV System through the flat panel TV, placing the panel in Standby causes  
the sound to stop. To have the sound continue when the flat panel TV turns On, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select HDMI Control Setting from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select Hold Sound Status from the submenu.  
4 ) Select On to allow sound from an AV System to play when the panel turns On.  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Note: To have the sound continue when the flat panel TV turns On, confirm that the Switch to TV Sound option  
appears on the HDMI Control menu before turning the panel Off (see page 87).  
5.4.2 Turn OFF the Power With an HDMI Command  
The “Power Off Control” function is valid for the devices connected to any of the panel’s HDMI ports. To power off  
a connected device when the flat panel TV is turned Off, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select HDMI Control Setting from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select Power Off Control from the submenu.  
4 ) Select On to allow the panel to power off the connected equipment.  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
5.4.3 Turn ON the Power With an HDMI Command  
The panel ships from the factory with the Power On command activated. If this feature is turned off in error, it can  
be reactivated. To power on the flat panel TV automatically when a connected Pioneer recorder or player is turned  
On and images are sent to the panel, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select HDMI Control Setting from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select Power-On Ready from the submenu.  
4 ) Select On to have another device power-on the panel.  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
5.4.4 Test the Power Control (On/Off)  
Your flat panel TV provides an HDMI control option to test equipment power when it is connected to the panel’s  
HDMI ports and it has been properly assigned to an Input.  
To confirm that the Power On/Off control function is working, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select HDMI Control Setting from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select a test option (Power On Test or Power Off Test ) from the submenu.  
A list containing all HDMI connected equipment appears.  
4 ) Select a piece of equipment from the list.  
5 ) Repeat this process to test other equipment from the list.  
6 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu when all testing is complete.  
If the Power On/Off Test fails, check the connection points and the settings.  
5.5 Connect a Game Console or Camcorder  
Your flat panel TV supplies direct connections for a game console, camcorder, or other Audio/Visual (AV)  
equipment through INPUT 3. To watch an image coming from a game console or camcorder, press INPUT 3 on  
the remote control or repeatedly press INPUT on the panel to select INPUT 3. For details on game console  
settings, refer to “2.6.2 Connect Your Other Pioneer Equipment” and “4.1.4 Set the Panel to Recognize a Game  
Console.”  
Use the connection type specified by the equipment. Connect equipment only to terminals that are actually to be  
used.  
5.6 Use the IR REPEATER OUT  
Connecting control cables between the flat panel TV and other Pioneer equipment allows to operate the  
connected equipment by sending commands from its remote control to the remote control sensor on your flat  
panel TV.  
This function is helpful when controlling Pioneer equipment from other Pioneer equipment.  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
5.7 Operate the Home Media Gallery  
05  
With Home Media Gallery, you can enjoy digital content such as movies, music, and photo files on your high-end  
flat panel TV. Play content from files stored on one or more media servers connected by a home or local area  
network (LAN) or those stored on a USB flash drive. After connecting via a broadband router or an Ethernet hub  
to a media server with network software, navigate through the digital content visible on the Home Media Gallery.  
The flat panel TV supports Mass Storage Class and PTP devices through USB interface and DLNA-compatible  
devices through a network.  
DLNA CERTIFIED™ Audio/Video/Image Player  
This unit complies with the DLNA Networked Device Interoperability Guidelines - expanded: October 2006 (v1.5).  
When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA-compatible device is connected to this player, some  
setting changes of software or other devices may be required. Please refer to the operating instructions for the  
software or device for more information.  
Supported File Formats  
The following sections show supported file formats that can be played back or displayed on the flat panel TV. These  
formats are applicable to network sources. Most are also applicable to USB sources. However, media server  
content protected by digital rights management such as WMDRM10 (Windows Media Digital Rights  
Management 10), may not play on the panel.  
Supported Video Formats  
• Windows Media Video 9 (WMV9): MP@ML  
• Windows Media Video 9 (WMV9) Advanced Profile (VC-1): AP@L1, MP@ML  
• MPEG-2 PS: MP@ML  
• MPEG-2 TS: MP@ML  
• MPEG-1  
• MPEG-4 Part2 (SP/ASP): SP@L3, ASP@L5  
• MPEG-4 Part10 (H.264/AVC): Main Profile 3.0  
Supported Audio Formats  
• Windows Media Audio 9 (WMA9): Sampling rates; 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz  
• MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3): Sampling rates; 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz  
• Linear PCM (WAV): Sampling rates; 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz  
• MPEG-4 AAC: Sampling rates; 16 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz  
• HE-AAC: Sampling rates; 16 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz  
Supported Image Formats  
• JPEG: Resolution; up to 3680 x 2760 pixels  
• PNG: Resolution; up to 3680 x 2760 pixels  
• GIF: Resolution; up to 3680 x 2760 pixels  
• TIFF: Resolution; up to 1600 x 1200 pixels  
• BMP: Resolution; up to 3072 x 2304 pixels  
Supported File Extensions  
This product supports the playback of files with the following extensions.  
• Video: .wmv, .asf, .mpg, .mpeg, .mpe, .m2p, .m4v, .mp4v, .mp4, .mov  
• Audio: .wma, .mp3, .wav, .m4a, .aac  
• Image: .jpg, .jpeg, .png, .gif, .bmp, .tif, .tiff  
Note: Even the supported format files that are listed above may or may not play properly or completely, depending  
on the media server, USB device, bit rate stream and other content characteristics, as well as other factors.  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Even when files have a supported file extension, some files may not play or display properly, depending on the  
content or media server type.  
Some formats may not be supported nor displayed on Home Media Gallery as formats that individual media  
servers support vary. Refer to the media server manufacturer’s or other relevant websites for supported formats.  
Although a particular format is supported, not all content functions may operate properly. If the content fails to  
appear properly, contact the content producer for assistance. In addition, some supported file formats may fail to  
play properly when imported from an unknown USB device.  
Notes: You cannot use the Home Media Gallery until dimmed elements on the menu screen turn white.  
Some Home Media Gallery functions, such as trick play during Fast Forward and Rewind, Time Search  
and Search, may not work depending on the media server’s capability and functionality.  
Home Media Gallery complies with the DLNA Networked Device Interoperability Guidelines - expanded:  
October 2006 (v1.5). If your media server supports different DLNA version(s), some Home Media Gallery  
function(s) and content format(s) may not be supported.  
Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the Home Media Gallery features due to communication  
error/malfunctions associated with your network connection and/or your PC, or other connected  
equipment. Contact your PC manufacturer or Internet service provider.  
Content may not play or display properly, depending on the conditions of use or media server in use.  
The Home Media Gallery functions as a WMDRM10-ND (Microsoft Windows Media DRM for networked  
devices). Content can only be navigated from the media servers that support WMDRM10-ND. Content  
may not play, depending on the DRM protection level.  
This system may not display content from incompatible memory cards.  
5.7.1 Network Connections  
To connect to a network, set up the Home Media Gallery through the Home Media Gallery menu. Press the HMG  
button on the remote control to cause the menu to appear. To use the Home Media Gallery, connect to a home  
network (LAN) via an Ethernet hub or cable directly to a media server.  
Usable Media Servers  
A media server contains digital content such as movies, music, and photo files. PCs that have pre-installed media  
server software and recorders with a media server function are considered the media server. There are some  
media servers that you can choose from; for example, Windows Media Connect, Windows Media Player that has  
a media sharing function, and DLNA compliant servers.  
• Windows Media Connect 2.0  
Windows Media Connect runs on a 32-bit PC with Windows XP Service Pack 2 (SP2) installed.  
When it is already installed, you can enjoy Home Media Gallery using your PC.  
• Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP  
Windows Media Player 11 features Media Sharing that runs on a 32-bit PC with Windows XP Service Pack 2  
(SP2) installed.  
If Windows Media Connect 2.0 is not installed in your PC, you can download Windows Media Player 11 from  
Microsoft’s website.  
• Windows Media Player 11 for Windows Vista  
Windows Media Player 11 is featured in 32-bit Windows Vista PCs.  
When selecting the most suitable media server, please visit Microsoft’s website for system requirements, known  
issues, installation procedures, and other updated information.  
• DLNA CERTIFIEDTM digital media servers  
The server is a DLNA-certified digital media server such as PC software, PCs and other devices installed with  
DLNA-certified software. When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA-compatible device is  
connected to this player, some setting changes of the software or device may be required. Refer to the  
device(s) operating instructions for more information.  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Connect via an Ethernet Hub  
If already operating one or more media servers on a home or local area network (LAN), connect the flat panel TV  
to the Ethernet (LAN) hub using a standard (“straight-through”) Ethernet (LAN) cable. See the diagram below.  
Note: Although the Home Media Gallery supports 10BASE-T, it is better to use 100BASE-TX for improved display  
quality and speed.  
T
T
W
W
Rear view  
Media server 2  
Ethernet hub  
(Router with hub function)  
Straight-through  
cable  
Media server 1  
Connect directly to a Media Server  
To run a PC as a media server, connect the flat panel TV directly to the PC using a twisted (“cross-over”) Ethernet  
(LAN) cable. See the diagram below.  
T
T
W
W
Rear view  
Cross-over cable  
Media server 1  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Confirm the IP Address  
After making the network connection, follow the instructions below to confirm the IP Address before accessing  
the network. (The setup is effective for Auto only. To perform the procedure, DHCP on your server or router must  
be valid. See “5.10 HMG Setup”)  
1 ) Press HMG on the remote control.  
The Home Media Gallery menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select HMG Setup.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option.  
3 ) Press ENTER.  
4 ) Select Network Setup.  
5 ) Select Auto DHCP.  
The screen turns from “Select” mode to “Input” mode.  
6 ) Select Yes.  
7 ) Press RETURN.  
The HMG Setup screen returns.  
The IP Address is assigned.  
The Home Media Gallery supports Auto IP and DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). If the system  
failed to assign the IP Address or if you want to obtain different addresses, select No then enter IP Address  
and Subnet mask. See Network Setup or HMG Setup to enter an address manually.  
For information on DHCP, refer to network device’s operating instructions.  
You may need to contact your service provider or network administrator when manually entering an IP Address.  
Some media servers block or are programmed to block access to client servers. When connecting the flat panel  
TV, check the media server for client server access rights.  
5.7.2 Connect a USB Device  
You can also enjoy content stored on memory cards by connecting a USB device to the flat panel TV. The root  
directory or Device List screen appears as soon as a USB flash drive or a multi-card reader is connected to the  
USB port. Another option is to connect your digital camera directly to the flat panel TV using a commercially  
available USB connector cable.  
If for any reason, the Folder/Content List or Device List fails to appear, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Press HMG.  
The Home Media Gallery menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select USB.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option.  
3 ) Press ENTER to confirm the selection.  
4 ) Select the desired device.  
The USB Device screen must be displayed.  
5 ) Press ENTER to navigate to a folder or play a file/content.  
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
6 ) Press EXIT or HMG to exit Home Media Gallery.  
Note: The flat panel TV displays the USB Device screen or root directory immediately after inserting a USB device.  
In this case, start from Step 5. When a multi-card reader is inserted, the USB Device screen is displayed. In  
this case, start from Step 4.  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Flat Panel TV  
USB flash drive  
Digital Camera with USB  
Mass Storage Class  
(PTP also supported)  
Flash media via USB adapter (Multi-card Reader)  
Note: Do not use any USB devices other than those specified. Using other devices can cause a malfunction.  
Readable Data Format  
This system reads FAT16, FAT32 or NTFS.  
Readable Data Files  
Movie, music, and photo files play with the exception of Digital Rights Management (WMDRM10) protected files.  
Your flat panel TV supports a single USB device at a time. Also, the panel does not support USB hubs.  
This system may not be able to display modified or edited content from a PC or other equipment.  
Your flat panel TV supports the USB Mass Storage Class and PTP devices.  
Some digital cameras may require a setup procedure for Mass Storage Class data transfer. The setup is done on  
the camera. See the operating instructions supplied with the digital camera. Depending on the type of your  
memory card or camera, some images may fail to display.  
Remove a USB Device  
To remove a USB device, exit the Home Media Gallery first then disconnect the device.  
Be sure to exit the Home Media Gallery screen before removing the USB device. If you remove the USB device  
while the Home Media Gallery screen is displayed, data inside the memory may be damaged.  
Do not insert or remove the USB device immediately after the system is switched On or Off. This action may cause  
data inside the memory to be damaged.  
Pioneer is not liable for any loss or damage to the data inside the USB flash drive.  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
5.8 Run the Home Media Gallery  
05  
1 ) Press HMG.  
The Home Media Gallery menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select Media Navigator, USB, HMG Playlist or HMG Setup.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option then press ENTER.  
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
3 ) Press EXIT or HMG to exit Home Media Gallery.  
Media Navigator  
USB  
HMG Playlist  
HMG Setup  
Use the Media Navigator  
By selecting Media Navigator, the previously selected server menu automatically appears on the screen. When  
only one server is found, the system automatically connects the server. You can also use the TOOLS Menu to  
switch to another server or manually select a server from the Server List. The screen automatically changes to  
the Server List if there are no previous servers.  
1 ) Press HMG.  
The Home Media Gallery menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select Media Navigator.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option then press ENTER.  
A server menu appears. The file/folder configuration may vary depending on the server selected.  
3 ) Select a desired server from the Server List.  
4 ) Select the desired folder to navigate or file/content to play.  
Movie  
Music  
Photo  
User Files  
4
(Sample screen)  
5 ) Press ENTER.  
The appropriate Player launches and begins playing the selected file.  
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
6 ) Press EXIT or HMG to exit Home Media Gallery.  
Note: The Media Navigator launch depends on the option selected in Auto Connection under “5.10 HMG Setup.”  
Select a server from the Server list to open Media Navigator.  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Navigate through a USB Device’s Files and Folders  
Like navigating through media servers, select the specific file from a device on the USB Device screen to start an  
appropriate player. For details, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Press HMG.  
The Home Media Gallery menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select USB.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option then press ENTER.  
The USB Device screen appears. Select the device. When using a single directory device (USB flash drive),  
the USB Device screen does not appear.  
USB A  
USB B  
USB C  
USB D  
USB E  
USB F  
USB G  
15  
(Sample screen)  
3 ) Select the desired folder to navigate or file/content to play.  
4 ) Press ENTER.  
The appropriate Player launches and begins playing the selected file.  
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
5 ) Press EXIT or HMG to exit Home Media Gallery.  
Note: The USB Device screen appears when using a multi-card reader or multiple flash drive devices. In this case,  
select the device containing the desired content.  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Screen Components  
Screen display options are:  
• List  
• Thumbnail  
• Thumbnail List  
Press TOOLS then select Change View from the TOOLS Menu to choose from the screen display options. The  
options are available for Movie, Music and Photo menus.  
List screen  
3
(Sample screens)  
Folder 1  
Folder 2  
Folder 3  
4
1
Content 2  
Content 3  
Content 4  
Content 5  
40  
2
Thumbnail screen  
Thumbnail List screen  
1
Folder 2  
Folder 3  
Content 2  
Content 3  
40  
2
1
3
40  
3
2
1. Item being selected  
2. Number of total items  
3. Scroll bar (displayed when one or more pages follow)  
4. Icon or thumbnail of the selected item (if obtained)  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
HMG Playlist  
Each category (Movie, Music, and Photo) has five different Playlists with up to 100 files each. The HMG Playlist can  
contain sound and image files selected in “Media Navigator”. To edit a Playlist, use the TOOLS Menu.  
1 ) Press HMG.  
The Home Media Gallery menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select HMG Playlist.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option then press ENTER.  
3 ) Select Movie, Music or Photo from the HMG Playlist screen.  
Movie  
Music  
Photo  
3
4 ) Select a desired list from Playlist 1 through Playlist 5.  
5 ) Select the desired content.  
This menu can appear as a List, Thumbnail or Thumbnail List screen. Press TOOLS then select Change  
view from the TOOLS Menu to cycle through the views.  
6 ) Press ENTER to play the content.  
The appropriate Player launches and begins playing the selected file.  
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
7 ) Press EXIT or HMG to exit Home Media Gallery.  
5.8.1 Show Your Movie Files on the Flat Panel TV  
When selecting movie content from the server menu on the Media Navigator screen or USB Device screen, the  
Movie Player automatically launches. Select a category, folder, or device to access the submenu containing the  
file or content.  
Selecting a movie file from the HMG Playlist causes the Movie Player screen to appear, just like selecting a file  
from a server.  
Screen Components  
The following information automatically appears on screen for a few seconds when Movie Player launches or  
playback status changes (controlled by the remote, for example). Pressing DISPLAY or selecting Information on  
the TOOLS Menu also causes the information to appear.  
(Content information)  
3
1
2
1. Album name  
2. Content title  
3. Date  
Album Name  
MovieTITLE_0123456  
Playback 00:02:01/00:05:24  
1
YYYY/MM/DD  
(Player status)  
4. Playback status (status icon, status information,  
current time/total time)  
5. Progress bar  
6. Sound mode  
7. Play mode  
8. Random mode  
9. A-B Repeat mode  
4
5
6
7
9
8
1
During A-B Repeat mode  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Movie Player key guide  
Mode  
Playback  
Key(s) used  
Function  
ENTER, (PLAY) Plays back the content  
Stop  
(STOP),  
RETURN  
Stops the Movie Player and returns to the previous screen  
(List/Thumbnail/Thumbnail List)  
PAUSE  
ENTER,  
Pauses the playback  
(PAUSE)  
Fast Forward  
(FF),   
Fast forward while playback.  
Each press toggles the Fast Forward speed. To discontinue  
Fast Forward, press ENTER or PLAY. Normal playback mode  
returns.  
Fast Reverse  
Slow Forward  
(RWD),   
Fast reverse while playback.  
Each press toggles the Fast Reverse speed. To discontinue  
Fast Reverse, press ENTER or PLAY. Normal playback mode  
returns.  
+ ,  
+  
Slow forward when in PAUSE.  
Each press toggles the Slow Forward speed. To discontinue  
Slow Forward, press ENTER or PLAY. Normal playback  
content.  
Forward (15 sec.)  
Reverse (15 sec.)  
Time Search  
Skips 15 seconds forward then plays back the video or pauses  
while in PAUSE  
pauses while in PAUSE  
TOOLS  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
Add to HMG Playlist TOOLS  
A-B Repeat  
Random  
Play Mode  
Audio  
TOOLS  
TOOLS  
TOOLS  
TOOLS  
TOOLS  
TOOLS  
TOOLS  
Picture  
Sound  
Information  
Note: Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or software version.  
During playback, an error may arise in time-related information, depending on the content or server software.  
Also, some functions may not be supported, depending on the content.  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Content obtained from a digital video camera that supports H.264/AVC format can be played through the USB  
port.  
To play content from this type of camera, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Insert the USB flash drive containing the content into a card reader connected to the flat panel TV.  
The USB device’s Folder/Contents List appears on screen.  
Refer to the operation manual that came with the individual device for connection and setting help.  
2 ) Select a Folder/Contents List.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option then press ENTER.  
3 ) Select the desired content.  
Note: Some content may not be played back or may be a short delay between audio and video, depending on the file.  
Not all files (including edited files) may be supported with the Movie Player. Stored content may not appear in  
the “Shortcut” folder, depending on the saved position in the memory device.  
Also, content may not play properly, depending on the USB card reader used.  
5.8.2 Play Your Music Files on the Flat Panel TV  
When selecting music content from the server menu (on the Media Navigator screen or from the USB Device  
screen), the Music Player automatically launches. Select a category, folder, or device to access the submenu  
containing your file or content. Selecting a music file from HMG Playlist causes the Music Player screen to  
appear, just like selecting a file from a server.  
After playing music content through once, the music content loops as background music (BGM). To stop looping,  
stop the playback, exit the Home Media Gallery or start playing content other than photo content.  
Screen Components  
1
Artist : XXXXX  
Album : XXXXX  
1. Artist/album information  
2. Music Player thumbnail icon/jacket image  
3. Player list  
XXXXXX.mp3  
Previous Song  
XXXXXX.mp3  
Next Song  
2
3
The following information and playback status appear on the Music Player screen.  
4. Play mode  
5. Random mode  
4
5
6. Playback status (status icon, status information,  
current time/total time)  
7. Progress bar  
Playback 00:02:01/00:05:24  
YYYY/MM/DD  
6
7
9
8. A-B Repeat mode  
9. Date  
8
During A-B Repeat mode  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Music Player key guide  
Mode  
Playback  
Key(s) used  
Function  
ENTER, (PLAY) Plays back the selected content  
Stop  
(STOP),   
Stops the playback  
Pauses the playback  
PAUSE  
ENTER,  
(PAUSE)  
Fast Forward  
Fast Reverse  
(FF)  
See the Movie Player key guide  
Press and hold to start Fast Forward. When in Fast  
Forward, press to change the playback speed. To  
discontinue Fast Forward, press ENTER or PLAY. Normal  
(RWD)  
Reverse, press to change the playback speed. To  
discontinue Fast Reverse, press ENTER or PLAY. Normal  
playback mode returns.  
Next  
Selects the next content  
Selects the previous content  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
Previous  
Time Search  
TOOLS  
Add to HMG Playlist TOOLS  
Random  
A-B Repeat  
Play Mode  
Sound  
TOOLS  
TOOLS  
TOOLS  
TOOLS  
Note: Files may not play properly, depending on the content.  
Some functions may not be supported, depending on the server type or software version.  
Playback continues. Pressing RETURN to move from the Player screen to the previously selected screen has  
no effect.  
5.8.3 Show Your Photo File on the Flat Panel TV  
When selecting photo content from the Media Navigator’s server menu or from the USB Device screen, the Photo  
Player automatically launches. Press ENTER to show content in full screen. Select a category, folder or device to  
access the submenu containing your file or content.  
Selecting a photo file from the HMG Playlist causes the Photo Player screen to appear, just like selecting a file  
from the server.  
Screen Components  
The following information automatically appears on screen for a few seconds when Photo Player launches or  
playback status changes (controlled by the remote, for example). Pressing DISPLAY or selecting Information on  
the TOOLS Menu also causes the information to appear.  
(Content information)  
1
2
3
1. Album name  
2. Content title  
3. Date  
(Player status)  
Album Name  
PhotoTITLE_0123456  
Playback 45678/99999  
YYYY/MM/DD  
4. Playback status  
(status icon, status information,  
current number/total number)  
5. Progress bar  
4
5
6
7
6. Play mode  
7. Random mode  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Photo Player key guide  
Mode  
Playback  
Key(s) used  
Function  
ENTER, (PLAY) Starts displaying a photo or playing a slideshow when in  
playback  
Stop  
(STOP),  
RETURN  
Stops the Player and returns to the previous screen (List/  
Thumbnail/Thumbnail List)  
PAUSE  
ENTER while  
playback,   
(PAUSE)  
Pauses the slideshow  
Move File Forward  
Move File Backward  
Rotate (clockwise)  
Displays the next image content  
Displays the previous image content  
(FF), TOOLS Rotates the image 90 clockwise.  
o
o
Each press toggles the rotation angle by 90 between 90 ,  
o
o
o
180 , 270 and 0 .  
(See Use the TOOLS Menu)  
o
Rotate (counter-  
clockwise)  
(RWD)  
Rotates the image 90 counter-clockwise.  
o
o
Each press toggles the rotation angle by 90 between 270 ,  
o
o
180 , 90 and 0 .  
Change BGM  
Zoom  
,   
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
See Use the TOOLS Menu  
TOOLS  
Add to HMG Playlist TOOLS  
Random  
TOOLS  
TOOLS  
TOOLS  
TOOLS  
TOOLS  
TOOLS  
TOOLS  
Play Mode  
Slide Show  
Music Player  
Picture  
Sound  
Information  
Note: Some functions may not be supported, depending on the server type or software version.  
Even files in the supported format may fail to play properly, depending on the content.  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
5.9 Use the TOOLS Menu  
05  
Pressing TOOLS on the remote control causes the TOOLS Menu to appear. Select various play and display modes  
from this menu. The selectable menu items differ, depending on the current menu (refer to “3.6.1 Use the TOOLS  
Menu”).  
Update Server List  
Use this function to update the currently selected Server List. This option is available on the Server List screen  
regardless if the server is connected to your flat panel TV.  
1 ) Press TOOLS while showing the Server List.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
TOOLS  
Update Server List  
Music Player  
2 ) Select Update Server List from the TOOLS Menu.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option then press ENTER.  
Information on the connected server is updated.  
Delete Server  
Your flat panel TV allows disconnected servers to be removed from the Server List.  
To delete a server, follow the steps below. This option is available on the Server List screen (server not connected).  
1 ) Press TOOLS while the cursor is on the unconnected server on the Server List screen.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
TOOLS  
Delete Server  
Update Server List  
2 ) Select Delete Server from the TOOLS Menu.  
A Delete Server screen appears.  
3 ) Select Yes then press ENTER.  
The server disappears from the list.  
To cancel the server deletion, select No.  
USB Device  
The TOOLS menu provides a screen to see what USB device(s) are connected or supported. Follow the directions  
below to open the USB Device screen. This option is available on the Folder/Contents List (USB) screen.  
1 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
TOOLS  
USB Device  
Picture  
2 ) Select USB Device from the TOOLS Menu.  
A USB Device screen appears, showing currently connected USB devices.  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Favorites Entry  
Registering the Home Media Gallery in Favorites (TOOLS Menu) provides quick access to the Home Media Gallery  
top screen while watching TV or other programs. This option is available on the Home Media Gallery screen.  
1 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
TOOLS  
Favorite Entry : Off  
On  
Delete from HMG Playlist  
2 ) Select Favorites Entry.  
3 ) Set the option to On then press ENTER.  
Registration completes.  
To remove the Home Media Gallery from Favorites, select Off.  
Detailed Display  
Select this option to display the detailed information on the current content. This option is available on the Media  
Navigator, Playlist List (Movie/Music/Photo), and Folder/Contents List screens.  
1 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
TOOLS  
Detailed Display  
Delete Server  
2 ) Select Detailed Display from the TOOLS Menu.  
Detailed information appears.  
Pressing RETURN causes the information to disappear and the previous screen to return.  
Sort  
A sort option is available under Media Navigator and Folder/Contents List screens. This function is unavailable  
for folders or content on a USB device. To sort the items contained in the Folder/Contents List, follow the steps  
below.  
1 ) Press HMG.  
The Home Media Gallery menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select the desired folder and/or content in the Media Navigator.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option then press ENTER.  
3 ) Press TOOLS then select Sort from the TOOLS Menu.  
A Sort dialog screen appears.  
Sort  
Condition  
Order  
:
:
Title  
Bottom-Up  
Start  
4 ) Select the appropriate option on the Sort dialog screen.  
• Condition: Title, Track Number, Genre, Artist or Date.  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
• Order: Bottom-Up or Top-Down  
5 ) Select Start on the Sort dialog screen.  
The sorting starts based on your selection and sort results are displayed.  
While sorting continues, content playback is available. To return to the sort screen, press RETURN any time  
during playback.  
To cancel the sort mode, press RETURN.  
Notes: The “Select a sorting order.” screen is available and may be left on the screen while navigating through  
the music categories.  
Sort may not be available, depending on the server used.  
Available submenus for Condition vary, depending on the server used.  
Search  
The flat panel TV’s built-in Search function provides a convenient way to find items held in a Folder/Contents List.  
However, the searching function is unavailable for folders or content on a USB device.  
Simply enter a word and the results appear on screen. To begin a Search, follow the directions below. This option  
is available on the Media Navigator and Folder/Contents List screens.  
1 ) Press HMG.  
The Home Media Gallery menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select the desired folder and/or content in the Media Navigator.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option then press ENTER.  
3 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
4 ) Select Search from the TOOLS Menu.  
A Search dialog screen appears.  
Search  
Condition  
Keyword  
:
:
Title  
----  
Start  
5 ) Select Title, Genre or Artist for Condition, or enter a Keyword.  
Pressing ENTER on the Keyword menu causes the software keyboard to appear on the screen.  
6 ) Enter the word on the software keyboard.  
Refer to “Software Keyboard” under “3.2.5 Create the List of Channels” for operation details.  
7 ) Select OK on the software keyboard to bring up the Search dialog screen and hide the keyboard.  
To cancel the key word entry, select Cancel.  
8 ) Select Start on the Search dialog screen.  
The searching starts based on the word entered with results are appearing on screen.  
While searching continues, content is playable. To return to the search screen, press RETURN any time  
during playback.  
To cancel the search mode, press RETURN.  
Notes: The Search function may not be available, depending on the server.  
Available submenus for Condition vary, depending on the server used.  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Slide Show  
A slideshow is simply a series of still pictures, appearing one after the other, usually in a timed procession. Select  
the desired photo file to display a still picture then press ENTER to start a slideshow. After a slideshow launches,  
pressing ENTER toggles between PLAY and PAUSE. Or press PLAY to start the slideshow immediately. This option  
is available on the Media Navigator, Folder/Contents List, and Photo Player. You can set the Photo Player to play  
a slideshow with background music (BGM) and various visual effects. To begin a slideshow, follow the directions  
below.  
1 ) Press HMG.  
The Home Media Gallery menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select Media Navigator or USB from the menu.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option then press ENTER.  
3 ) Select a folder containing photo content.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight a folder then press ENTER.  
The Thumbnail screen appears (Thumbnail List or List screen appears, depending on the setting).  
4 ) Select the desired photo file.  
The selected photo content appears in full screen.  
5 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
6 ) Select a slideshow option.  
7 ) Select Random, Off, Black Out, Cross Sweep, Horizontal Blinds, Boxed In/Out, Panoramic or Scenic for  
Effect.  
8 ) Select Off or On for Monochrome.  
9 ) Select a time interval: 3Seconds, 5Seconds, 10Seconds, 15Seconds, 30Seconds or 60Seconds.  
Slide Show  
Effect  
:
:
:
:
:
Black Out  
Off  
Interval  
5Seconds  
Off  
Random  
Play Mode  
BGM  
Repeat All  
Off  
Start  
10 ) Turn the Random option Off or On.  
For details, refer to Random.  
11 ) Select the desired option for Play Mode.  
Select Single, Repeat, Repeat All or All. For details, refer to “Play Mode” (page 111).  
12 ) Select any desired BGM.  
Select music content from Playlist 1 through 5 or the USB device.  
13 ) Select Start.  
The slideshow starts and photo images in the folder automatically appear one by one.  
To force the next image to appear, press .  
To force the previous image to return, press .  
14 ) Press ENTER or (Pause) to stop the slideshow.  
The Photo Player pauses.  
15 ) Press ENTER again to resume the slideshow.  
To cancel the slideshow and stop the Photo Player, press RETURN or (Stop) during playback. The  
previous screen returns.  
Note: After setting the Interval time, it may take longer than the preset time. As the Interval time refers to the time  
length up until the Home Media Gallery starts to obtain the next image. Key operations may not work while  
obtaining the next image.  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Add to HMG Playlist  
The Home Media Gallery function provides “HMG Playlist” – a self-contained play list that allows bookmarking  
favorite movie, music, and photo files from the network. You can store, edit, and sort up to 100 files in each Playlist  
List. This option is available on the Media Navigator, Folder/Contents List, Movie Player, Music Player, and Photo  
Player screens.  
1 ) While navigating or playing, select the file to be added to a HMG Playlist.  
2 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
3 ) Select Add to HMG Playlist from the TOOLS Menu.  
An Add to HMG Playlist dialog screen appears.  
4 ) Select a Playlist.  
Press /to select from Playlist 1 to Playlist 5.  
Add to HMG Playlist  
Add to  
:
Playlist 1  
[Total]  
:
050/100  
OK  
5 ) Select OK.  
To select other Playlist(s), repeat Steps 2 to 5.  
The file is added to the selected Playlist. The Total field changes as content is added to the playlist.  
To cancel the operation, press RETURN.  
Select Server  
When one or more servers are connected within the network, you can switch between servers. This option is  
available on the Media Navigator and Folder/Contents List screens.  
1 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select Select Server from the TOOLS Menu.  
The Server List appears.  
Server 01  
Server 02  
Server 03  
Server 04  
(Sample screen)  
4
3 ) Select the desired server.  
The screen changes to Media Navigator on the selected server.  
Notes: The Home Media Gallery can memorize previously connected servers. When the Media Navigator is  
launched, available servers are automatically located and connected.  
If a previously connected server cannot be found or if the server is in sleep mode, the server name is  
dimmed.  
In some cases, media servers that support “Wake On LAN” can be booted up. Select the server then press  
ENTER to transmit a “Wake On LAN” command to the highlighted server.  
When having “Wake On LAN” turns the server's power on, the server must be ready with the necessary  
settings already completed.  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Play Mode  
Your flat panel TV provides four repeat modes when using the Movie Player, Music Player, or Photo Player. Choose  
a playback mode (Repeat, Single, etc.) when playing multiple content files. To activate Play Mode, follow the steps  
below.  
1 ) While playing content, press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select Play Mode from the TOOLS Menu.  
Select Single, Repeat, Repeat All or All.  
Single : Plays the selected content only once  
Repeat : Plays the selected content in a loop  
Repeat All : Loop-plays all contents in a folder in order (when the last content file ends, the first file begins  
to play with all subsequent files playing in order continually)  
All : Plays all selected folder content in order only once  
TELEVISION  
Sound  
TOOLS  
Random  
All  
Play Mode : Single  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Time Search  
Change Name  
Playlist (1 through 5) can be renamed in HMG Playlist. To name a Playlist, follow the directions below. This option  
is available on the Playlist List (Movie/Music/Photo) screen.  
1 ) Press TOOLS while five Playlists in the HMG Playlist are on screen.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select Change Name from the TOOLS Menu.  
The software keyboard appears.  
Playlist Name  
P
L
A
Y
L
I
S
T
1
1
A
K
U
&
/
2
B
L
V
'
3
C
M
W
(
4
D
N
X
)
5
E
O
Y
+
?
[
6
F
P
Z
-
7
G
Q
,
8
H
R
.
9
I
0
J
Delete  
Space  
Caps  
S
:
T
;
*
/
_
~
@
"
$
`
%
<
!
#
]
=
{
|
^
>
}
OK  
Cancel  
3 ) Enter the new name.  
Refer to “Software Keyboard” under “3.2.5 Create the List of Channels” for operation details.  
4 ) Select OK after the new name is entered on the software keyboard.  
The software keyboard disappears and the newly named Playlist appears.  
Selecting Cancel causes the entry to stop and cancels the name entry process.  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Change View  
Select this option to cycle between the different views: List, Thumbnail, and Thumbnail List. This option is  
available on the Playlist List (Movie/Music/Photo), and Folder/Contents List screens.  
1 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select Change View from the TOOLS Menu.  
Select the screen option from List, Thumbnail or Thumbnail List.  
TOOLS Menu  
TELEVISION  
Music Player  
TOOLS  
Add to HMG Playlist  
Thumbnail List  
Change View : List  
Sort  
Thumbnail  
Search  
List screen  
Folder 1  
Folder 2  
Folder 3  
Thumbnail screen  
Content 2  
Content 3  
Content 4  
Content 5  
40  
Thumbnail List screen  
40  
Content 1  
Folder 2  
40  
Folder 3  
Content 2  
Content 3  
(Sample screens)  
Time Search  
The Time Search function allows the content to start playing at the preset time. This option is available on the  
Movie Player and Music Player screens.  
To allow Time Search, follow the steps below.  
1 ) While playing content, press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select Time Search from the TOOLS Menu.  
A Time Search dialog screen appears.  
Time Search  
[Total] : 01:00:00  
Jump  
:
00 : 00 : 00  
Start  
3 ) Enter the time (Hour, Minute and/or Second) to jump to.  
Enter Hour and Minute for movie content or Minute and Second for music content.  
Use /or buttons 0 to 9 (if a numeric key icon appears).  
Press / to select Hour and Minute (movie content) or Minute and Second (music content).  
4 ) Select Start then press ENTER to begin the time search.  
The movie (music) begins playing from the set time. To cancel the Time Search, press RETURN.  
Note: The Time Search function may not be supported, depending on the content, server software or software  
version.  
An error may arise in time-related information, depending on the content or server software.  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Picture  
The Picture option is another way to adjust the image quality. This option is available on the Movie Player and  
Photo Player screens. To adjust the picture, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
TOOLS  
Information  
Picture  
Sound  
Random  
2 ) Select Picture from the TOOLS Menu.  
A picture adjustment screen appears. For adjustment items, see “3.4 Adjust the Picture and Sound  
Quality.”  
3 ) Press RETURN to close the adjustment screen.  
Normal playback screen returns.  
Sound  
This Sound option is another way to adjust audio quality. This option is available on the Movie Player, Music Player  
and Photo Player screens. To adjust the sound, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
TOOLS  
Sound  
Random  
Play Mode  
2 ) Select Sound from the TOOLS Menu.  
A sound adjustment screen appears. For adjustment items, see “3.4 Adjust the Picture and Sound Quality.”  
3 ) Press RETURN to close the adjustment screen.  
Normal playback screen returns.  
Information  
The Information option displays the status information on the playing content. This option is available on the  
Movie Player and Photo Player screens. To show information during playback, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
TOOLS  
Information  
Zoom  
2 ) Select Information from the TOOLS Menu.  
An information (such as playback status) screen appears. Pressing DISPLAY also causes the information  
screen to appear.  
The screen automatically disappears after a short period of time.  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Audio  
Use this option to switch to another audio source if the currently played content has multiple audio sources  
(multi-language content, for example). This option is available on the Movie Player screen. To reveal multiple audio  
tracks, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
A-B Repeat  
TOOLS  
Time Search  
Audio : 1 L+R  
Information  
1 L  
Add to HMG Playlist  
2 ) Select Audio from the TOOLS Menu.  
Pressing / causes L, R or L+R to be selected. If the content has multiple audio sources, select L, R or  
L+R for each source.  
3 ) After entering the setting, press RETURN.  
Music Player  
The Music Player option allows changing BGM on any screen rather than using the music from the content. This  
option is only available when music is played on any screen other than Movie Player and Music Player. Music  
Player is available on the Media Navigator, Folder/Contents List, USB, HMG Playlist, Playlist List, and Photo Player  
screens. To activate Music Player, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
TOOLS  
Music Player  
Slide Show  
2 ) Select Music Player from the TOOLS Menu.  
The Music Player screen appears.  
After entering the setting, press RETURN. The previous screen returns.  
Move  
To show files in your preferred order, use the Move option to change the listing order in the HMG Playlist. This  
option is available on the Contents List (Playlist) screen.  
1 ) Move the cursor to the content to be moved within the HMG Playlist.  
2 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
TOOLS  
Move  
USB Device  
3 ) Select Move from the TOOLS Menu.  
4 ) Press / to move the content up or down.  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
5 ) Press ENTER.  
Editing completes and Move finishes.  
Delete from HMG Playlist  
Sometimes a file is no longer wanted. Your flat panel TV provides a method to delete content from a HMG Playlist.  
This option is available on the Contents List (Playlist) screen. To delete content from a Playlist, follow the steps  
below.  
1 ) Move the cursor to the content to be deleted from the HMG Playlist.  
2 ) Press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
TOOLS  
Delete from HMG Playlist  
Move  
3 ) Select Delete from HMG Playlist on the TOOLS Menu.  
A Delete from HMG Playlist dialog screen appears.  
4 ) Select Yes to remove the content item.  
The dialog screen disappears and the selected content is deleted from the HMG Playlist.  
To cancel, select No.  
A-B Repeat Mode  
Use this option to play the selected movie scenes or music programs repeatedly. This option is available only  
during normal playback on the Movie Player or Music Player.  
To set Repeat, follow the steps below.  
1 ) While playing content, press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
TOOLS  
A-B Repeat : A(Loop Start)  
Rotate  
2 ) Select A-B Repeat from the TOOLS Menu.  
3 ) Press ENTER to mark a starting point.  
4 ) Press ENTER again where the playback needs to stop.  
The Player status appears on the screen and the A-B Repeat mode icon changes.  
The selected part of the content begins looping.  
To end the looping and return to normal playback, press TOOLS then select Off while in the A-B Repeat mode.  
Note: If the screen display fails to match the player status, a malfunction may have occurred. Stop playback then  
try the operation again.  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Random  
Use this option to shuffle the order in the content list, playing the content at random. This option is available on  
the Movie Player, Music Player and Photo Player screens. To shuffle the playlist, follow the steps below.  
1 ) While playing content, press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
TOOLS  
Change Name  
Random : Off  
On  
2 ) Select Random from the TOOLS Menu.  
3 ) Select On.  
Random Repeat playback starts.  
To cancel the random mode, press TOOLS and select Off.  
Note: Random Repeat is only available for content playing in Repeat Mode (except when Single is selected).  
Rotate  
Use the Rotate option to turn an image 90º clockwise. This option is available on the Photo Player screen. To rotate  
an image, follow the steps below.  
1 ) While photo content appears, press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
TOOLS  
Rotate : 90  
Time Search  
2 ) Select Rotate from the TOOLS Menu.  
Each press of the ENTER button causes the displayed image to rotate by one quarter clockwise. It toggles  
between 90º, 180º, 270º and 0º.  
Note: The selected rotation angle is only effective for the visible image.  
Moving or changing the content causes the image to reset to the default view.  
116  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Zoom  
Use the Zoom option to enlarge the photo content displayed. This option is available on the Photo Player screen.  
To enlarge content, follow the steps below.  
1 ) While photo content appears, press TOOLS.  
The TOOLS Menu appears on screen.  
TELEVISION  
Music Player  
TOOLS  
Add to HMG Playlist  
Zoom : Off  
On  
2 ) Select Zoom from the TOOLS Menu.  
3 ) Press / to select On or Off.  
4 ) Press ENTER to confirm the selection.  
Selecting On causes the enlarged photo content to always appear.  
Displayed image differs depending on the content. If the content's aspect ratio is longer than 16:9, it  
appears fully stretched horizontally to both sides with images cropped at the top and bottom. If the  
content’s aspect ratio is wider than 16:9, it appears fully stretched vertically to top and bottom with images  
cropped on the right and left sides.  
A “zoom” icon appears on screen.  
5 ) While in Zoom mode, use the arrow buttons to scroll the content.  
Press or if the content’s aspect ratio is longer than 16:9, or if the content’s aspect ratio is wider  
than 16:9.  
6 ) Press RETURN or ENTER to cancel the Zoom and return to the normal screen.  
Note: The Zoom function is disabled when the content is a 16:9 picture.  
117  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
5.10 HMG Setup  
05  
Use the HMG Setup option for Network Setup, Auto Connection Setup and Default Settings. For more information  
about each option, refer to the following sections.  
Network Setup  
Auto Connection  
Default Settings  
On  
Network Setup  
Select whether to acquire the IP Address automatically or manually or, when acquiring manually, set the IP  
Address and Subnet mask. To access the Network Setup menu, follow the steps below.  
Automatic:  
To perform the procedure, DHCP on your server or router must be valid.  
1 ) Press HMG.  
The Home Media Gallery menu appears on screen.  
2 ) Select HMG Setup from the menu.  
Use the arrow buttons to highlight an option then press ENTER.  
3 ) Select Network Setup.  
4 ) Select Auto DHCP.  
5 ) Select Yes.  
The flat panel TV seeks and acquires an IP Address if available.  
6 ) Press EXIT or HMG to exit Home Media Gallery.  
Manual:  
Before activating, check your media server for IP Address and Subnet mask information.  
1 ) Access the Network Setup through the HMG Setup.  
2 ) Select Auto DHCP.  
3 ) Select No.  
4 ) Select the appropriate box.  
Use or to highlight an entry item (IP Address or Subnet mask) then press ENTER.  
No need to enter Default Gateway and DNS Server data.  
5 ) Enter the figures using buttons 0 to 9.  
Subnet mask (such as 255.255.255.0): Enter the same figures.  
IP Address (such as 192.168.201.***): Enter the same figures as used in the media server (PC, etc.). For  
***, enter 3-digit figures (0 – 254) that have not been used for other network connections.  
Use or to highlight other entry areas.  
6 ) Press ENTER on the appropriate box after the entry is complete.  
Repeat Steps 4 to 5 to complete Network setup.  
7 ) Press EXIT or HMG to exit Home Media Gallery.  
118  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Auto Connection  
Set Auto Connection to automatically connect to the last accessed server.  
For selection, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Auto Connection through the HMG Setup.  
2 ) Use or to change the setting.  
Selecting ON causes the display to access the last server. If the server is in Standby, a WOL (“Wake On  
LAN”) is sent to turn the last accessed server On.  
Selecting OFF causes a server list to appear on screen.  
“Wake on LAN (WOL)” turns the last accessed server’s power on if the server is WOL-compliant and is in  
Standby or sleep mode, once the server is awake, the Media Navigator screen appears. While your flat  
panel TV attempts to wake the server, a dialog screen appears. If the server is not WOL-compliant or the  
WOL function fails, a notice appears on the Server List screen.  
3 ) Press EXIT or HMG to exit Home Media Gallery.  
Reset to Default  
Occasionally it may be easier to return your flat panel TV to the HMG default values rather than try to correct a  
large number of accidental entries. To restore default settings within the Home Media Gallery, follow the steps  
below.  
1 ) Access Default Settings through the HMG Setup.  
2 ) Select Yes.  
The default values return and the Home Media Gallery screen appears.  
3 ) Press EXIT or HMG to exit Home Media Gallery.  
5.11 Other useful functions  
Screen Saver  
During navigation, the screen saver launches automatically if no activity is sensed within five minutes. However,  
when a movie or slideshow is playing, the panel stops the screen saver from activating.  
Press any button to cancel the screen saver. Dismissing the screen saver does not interfere when connecting a  
USB device.  
Note: Pressing DISPLAY to show the Player status or key guide before the screen saver activates may cause image  
retention.  
Important  
• Do not display the Player status and key guide for an extended period of time while playing a movie  
or slideshow to avoid possible image retention.  
119  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
05  
Dialog Screen Message  
No.  
Message  
Problem  
001  
100  
101  
102  
103  
Content cannot be played. (001) No details are available for the  
error, please check content  
A communication error  
occurred. (100)  
No further details are available  
for the error  
No response from server. (101) Flat Panel TV timed out due to  
delayed server response  
Disconnected from the  
network. (102)  
Cables are disconnected  
Response from server  
Server response is not  
indicating that it is impossible understandable  
to reply. (103)  
300  
301  
500  
501  
502  
Content cannot be played. (300) No further details are availabe  
for the error  
This format is not supported.  
(301)  
An unsupported file is selected  
Failed to authenticate. (500)  
Failed to authenticate. (501)  
Failed to authenticate.  
Failed to obtain DRM  
authorization  
Failed to obtain DRM  
authorization  
Failed to obtain DRM  
Check for failure of router, hub, authorization  
other network devices. (502)  
503  
Failed to authenticate content. Failed to obtain DRM  
The copyright notice of this file authorization  
might be invalid. (503)  
504  
505  
Failed to authenticate. (504)  
Failed to obtain WMDRM  
authorization  
Failed to authenticate.  
Failed to obtain WMDRM  
Check for failure of router, hub, authorization  
other network devices. (505)  
506  
507  
Failed to authenticate. The max Failed to obtain WMDRM  
count of access devices  
depends on server. (506)  
authorization  
Failed to authenticate. The  
license of this file might be  
invalid. Receive the license from  
a server. (507)  
Failed to obtain WMDRM  
authorization  
508  
Failed to authenticate. (508)  
Authorization error other than  
above  
Important  
• Displaying pictures in the Home Media Gallery for an extended period may cause an after-image.  
120  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
5.12 Add Other Audio Equipment  
05  
The flat panel TV’s digital audio output terminal (optical) can output Dolby Digital signals. Using an optical digital  
cable, connect an AV receiver to the digital audio output terminal (optical) on the rear of the flat panel TV. This  
connection allows audio such as from digital TV broadcasts to play back in high quality.  
If your AV receiver does not have a digital audio input terminal (optical), connect the AUDIO OUT terminals (AUDIO)  
on the rear of the flat panel TV to the audio input terminals on the AV receiver. However, this method may result in  
audio delay between the speakers and the sound from the AV receiver. To reduce the delay, mute the speakers on  
the flat panel TV. Nonetheless, you may still experience some delay between the sound and the picture.  
T
T
W
W
Rear view  
This connection is  
not required  
when connecting  
an AV amp  
equipped with  
the surround  
function to a  
subwoofer.  
Optical digital  
cable  
(commercially  
available)  
AV cable  
(commercially  
available)  
AV receiver  
Subwoofer  
Audio signals synchronized with currently displayed images are output to the AUDIO OUT terminals. However,  
audio accompanying the images are output to the SUB WOOFER OUT terminal.  
When using the digital audio output terminal (optical), select settings according to your AV Receiver. For more  
information, see the operating instructions that came with the AV receiver.  
Note: When signals are input from the HDMI terminals, no signals are output from the DIGITAL OUT terminal if they  
are copy guarded.  
To set the DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL) for your AV Receiver, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Digital Audio Output from the System Setup menu.  
3 ) Select an option from the submenu.  
Option  
Dolby Digital  
Description  
outputs in Dolby Digital for the Dolby format and  
outputs in PCM for the PCM format (default)  
PCM  
outputs in the PCM format regardless of signal type  
4 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
121  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Use Other Equipment With Your Flat Panel TV  
5.13 Add a Computer (PC)  
05  
Use the panel’s PC terminals to connect a personal computer. The PC input terminals are DDC2B-compatible;  
however, the Plug & Play function may not operate properly. When connected to a PC, the panel automatically  
identifies the input signal type. If the panel fails to see the PC or the picture is unclear, activate the Auto Setup  
function.  
5.13.1 Automatic Image Position and Clock Adjustments  
When connected to a PC, the image position and clock frequency can be adjusted. The Auto Setup option  
automatically adjusts these options but the image position and clock can be adjusted manually too. This section  
covers the automatic setup function and the following section covers how to manually adjust the image position  
and clock.  
The AV source device must be connected to the flat panel TV and turned on for these options to work. To use Auto  
Setup to automatically adjust the image position and clock, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Auto Setup from the Option menu.  
The function begins as soon as the selection is made. However, depending on the image, the position may  
not change after an adjustment.  
3 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Note: This function is unavailable when the PC is connected to the HDMI terminal.  
When Auto Setup finishes, the message, “Auto Setup Completed” appears on screen. However, if the setup fails  
to adjust the image, the message still appears if other factors affect the change. Auto Setup may fail with a PC  
image composed of similar patterns or a monochrome picture. If Auto Setup fails to correct the image position  
and clock, change the PC image and try again.  
5.13.2 Manual Image Position and Clock Adjustments  
Usually Auto Setup for a PC is the best practice for adjusting the image position and clock. However, to personally  
optimize position and clock, follow the steps below.  
1 ) Access the Option through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Manual Setup from the Option menu.  
3 ) Select an option to adjust.  
H/V Position Adjust  
Clock  
Phase  
Reset  
:
:
+120  
+15  
4 ) Use the up/down arrow buttons (/) to adjust the option.  
Clock and Phase also accept the left/right arrows (/) for changes.  
5 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
122  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Helpful Information  
06  
6 Helpful Information  
This chapter includes answers to some common questions and provides information about software/hardware  
used in your flat panel TV, cleaning methods, and troubleshooting/service information. If you need further  
assistance, please contact us and give us the chance to correct any issues you are experiencing. Thank you again  
for buying Pioneer!  
6.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)  
This section answers some of the questions received by our Support staff members. If your question is not here  
or you would like more information please see the Pioneer website for more FAQs (www.pioneerelectronics.com)  
about your specific model or our flat panel TVs in general.  
Why won’t the remote control buttons control my flat panel TV?  
If you select a mode other than TV on the remote control, your flat panel TV cannot receive the commands. Press  
the SELECT button to toggle the modes until the TV indicator lights.  
Why do I have to move closer to the panel to use the remote control?  
Weak batteries in the remote control can cause communication to fail. Try moving closer to the panel and attempt  
to control the panel with the remote. If the panel responds then change the batteries. If moving closer has no  
effect on the panel, check the surroundings for objects that might be blocking the signal. Also consider if other  
equipment that use remote controls have been added to the area around the panel. Objects and other IR signals  
can disrupt the remote.  
How can I protect the remote so it holds up longer?  
There are several ways to protect your remote control. Do not leave the remote sitting in direct sunlight as this  
can warp or deform the case. Avoid spilling liquids on the remote but if this happens, dry it immediately. If  
necessary, remove the batteries and allow the unit to dry completely before attempting to use it again. Areas with  
high humidity can also cause damage.  
Another issue that can affect the remote control is a leaking battery. The chemicals from a leaky battery can  
discolor or damage the remote. If there is visible leakage in a battery, remove both batteries immediately and  
carefully wipe the battery compartment clean. Replace both batteries with fresh ones.  
Can the signal from my panel’s remote mess up other audio/video equipment?  
The flat panel TV emits very weak infrared rays from its screen. If there is other equipment close by that also uses  
a remote control such as a DVR or stereo system, it may not receive commands from its remote control properly.  
Try moving the equipment farther away from the flat panel TV.  
Note: The strength of infrared rays emitted from the panel differs as the picture changes on the screen.  
Why does the picture seem to dim when I leave a picture on the screen?  
When still images (such as photos and computer images) stay on the screen for an extended period of time, the  
screen slightly dims. This function protects the panel from damage by automatically adjusting the screen  
brightness. The screen dims when a still image is detected for approximately three minutes.  
How do I find (or change) the Parental Control password if I forgot it?  
To clear a forgotten password, from an “Enter Password” window, press and hold the ENTER button on the remote  
control for three or more seconds. This action resets the password to the default value of 1234. To set a new  
password, refer to “3.5.1 Assign a Parental Control (Block) Password.”  
The picture and/or sound on a channel coming through the antenna doesn’t seem as clear as it should be,  
what can I do?  
Channels received through an antenna may have a weaker signal. To check signal strength, refer to “Check the  
Signal Strength” in Section 6.4.1 for more information.  
123  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Helpful Information  
06  
Why is the picture cropped when I feed a PC signal through the PRO-151FD/111FD’s HDMI input?  
If you select Video for Signal Type in the HDMI Input menu, the image is over-scanned (enlarged) but the panel  
automatically switches to PC when receiving computer signals. Refer to “5.2.1 Specify the HDMI Input Type.”  
Why won’t my Pioneer flat panel TV turn on?  
It may be that your remote has failing batteries or has been damaged. Check the power cord connection at the  
wall and on the back of the panel. Also try pressing a on you panel.  
Why does the blue or red power light on my flat panel TV blink?  
The panel’s internal protection circuit may have been activated for some reason. First turn the panel’s a off, wait  
one (1) or more minutes, then turn it back on. If the light still blinks, unplug the power cord from the outlet. Plug  
in the panel again after one to two minutes. If this fails to solve the problem, contact your dealer or Pioneer  
Customer Support (see inside back cover).  
What can I do to prevent image retention or burn-in?  
Burn-in or Image Retention is a side effect of plasma technology. After an image remains on the display for an  
extended time period, when the image changes or the unit is turned off, a faint afterimage or ghost of the original  
picture may remain. Continuing to play video or leaving the unit turned off for a length of time can clear the  
afterimage. We recommend the following steps and settings to prevent image retention or burn-in.  
• Set Screen Protection to On.  
• Select PC for a signal type when using a PC through an HDMI input.  
How do I clean my flat panel TV?  
To clean the screen surface, gently wipe it with the supplied dry cloth. Rubbing hard on the screen can scratch  
the special film coating. Use a clean soft cloth (cotton or flannel, for example) for the TV cabinet. For details on  
cleaning, refer to “6.3 Cleaning Methods.”  
6.2 Check Your Software/Hardware Version  
You can check the version of all software and hardware used in your flat panel TV. To access the version  
information, follow the directions below.  
1 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
2 ) Select Technical Info. from the System Setup menu.  
Software and hardware versions appear.  
3 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu after checking the versions.  
6.3 Cleaning Methods  
Before cleaning your flat panel TV, unplug the power cord from the outlet.  
When cleaning the screen or the glossy front bezel, gently wipe with a clean, dry cloth such as the supplied  
cleaning cloth or a similar type of soft cloth (e.g., cotton, flannel, etc.). Avoid a wet or damp cloth as that can let  
moisture seep into the panel. A dusty or rough-textured cloth (or if you rub too hard) can scratch surfaces.  
Note: Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners on the screen.  
The chassis or cabinet of the panel is mostly composed of plastic. Do not use chemicals such as benzene or paint  
thinner to clean the cabinet. These chemicals can mar the finish or cause other deterioration. When cleaning the  
cabinet, use the same type of cloth and method as described for the front bezel.  
Note: Do not affix labels, tapes, etc. to any visible location on the flat panel TV. Adhesives can discolor or mar the  
panel surfaces.  
124  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Helpful Information  
06  
6.4 Troubleshooting & Service Information  
General  
Issue  
Possible Solutions  
No power  
• Check the connection seating at the wall and panel.  
• See if the panel’s Power On button is turned ON.  
• Confirm that the remote is set to TV.  
If the panel indicator lights red, press TV (a) on the remote control or STANDBY/ON  
on the flat panel TV.  
Power suddenly turns  
off  
• Confirm that the Sleep Timer did not turn off your flat panel TV.  
• Check the power control setting.  
• See if the panel’s internal temperature has increased.  
Clean the vents or remove any blocking objects.  
Panel does not operate • External influences such as voltage malfunction, static electricity, etc., may cause  
improper operation.  
Unplug the panel from the wall and leave it for two or more minutes. Reconnect and  
attempt to operate the panel once again.  
Remote control does  
not operate  
• Check if TV power is off. Press the button when the POWER ON and STANDBY  
indicators are off.  
• Confirm that the mode is set to TV.  
• Examine the remote control sensor on the panel for obstructions that could block the  
signal.  
• Check that the remote’s batteries are installed properly and hold a change.  
Replace with new batteries to verify.  
• Consider changes in lighting such as stronger or new light sources that may affect the  
signal.  
Picture/Sound  
Issue  
Possible Solutions  
No picture and sound  
• Check the antenna connections.  
• Reseat the cable connections for other equipment.  
• Confirm that Parental Control is inactive.  
• Enter the password to temporarily remove Parental Control (block).  
• Confirm that the panel is set to watch a TV channel instead of an input source.  
No picture  
• Check the picture adjustment settings.  
Reset to default values if necessary.  
• Confirm that the connected equipment is installed and programmed properly.  
• If viewing an image from a PC, confirm that the signal is compatible.  
• Check for any obstacles in front of the Room Light Sensor.  
Screen appears dark  
Odd coloring and shades • Review the room lighting for recent changes or different natural lighting sources from  
or misaligned images  
windows or doorways.  
• Check the picture tone and adjust as necessary.  
Picture is cut off or runs • Check the screen size for the current channel/input source.  
off screen  
• Confirm that the position of the picture is centered.  
125  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Helpful Information  
06  
Picture/Sound  
Issue  
Possible Solutions  
Picture but no sound  
• Confirm that the sound is not muted or that the volume is turned down.  
• When using a video or PC input source, check that the audio terminals are connected.  
Sound but no picture  
• Check if Picture Off is selected from the TOOLS Menu.  
With this option selected, the screen is deactivated; only audio is output. To restore the  
screen display, press any button other than VOL +/or MUTING.  
Sound is wrong (one side • Check if the speaker cable connections have been reversed between the left and right.  
only or reversed between  
left and right)  
• Confirm that speaker cables are connected and seated properly.  
• Check the sound balance and adjust if necessary.  
Brightness and color  
tone on the sides differ  
from the center  
• If images in 4:3 mode or letterbox images are displayed for long periods or for shorter  
periods over several days, an after-image may remain due to burning.  
Watch images in Full screen as much as possible to avoid this issue.  
• Change the Brightness Sync. setting to Auto.  
This function adjusts the brightness of the gray side masks for the brightness of the main  
image.  
• Use the Screen Protection function (see “3.6.2 Extend Your Panel Life”).  
After-image lag  
• If a bright or still image was on screen for a long period before switching to a darker  
image the original image may appear as an after-image or ghost. Try playing another  
bright image, switching the picture quickly many times, or show a very active scene.  
• Use the Screen Protection function (see “3.6.2 Extend Your Panel Life”).  
• Display the Video Pattern screen to help reduce after-image lag.  
HDMI Control  
Issue  
Possible Solutions  
HDMI Controls do not  
function  
• Check the connections between the panel and the HDMI equipment.  
• Confirm that the settings for the panel are correct.  
• Confirm that the equipment is HDMI compliant.  
• Confirm that settings for the equipment are correct.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions that came with the equipment.  
Error message: “The  
device cannot be  
operated. Please check  
connection”  
• Check the connections between the panel and the HDMI equipment.  
• Confirm that settings for the equipment are correct.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions that came with the equipment.  
No picture and sound  
• Check the connections between the panel and the HDMI equipment.  
• Confirm that settings for the equipment are correct.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions that came with the equipment.  
No picture  
• Check the connections between the panel and the HDMI equipment.  
• Confirm that settings for the equipment are correct.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions that came with the equipment.  
No sound  
• Check the connections between the panel and the HDMI equipment.  
• Confirm that settings for the equipment are correct.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions that came with the equipment.  
• Check that the AV system is connected to an HDMI terminal and any recorder/player is  
connected to another HDMI terminal.  
126  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Helpful Information  
06  
Home Media Gallery/NETWORK  
Issue  
Possible Solutions  
No servers are found  
• Confirm that the PC is On and not in Standby or Sleep (nothing is chosen in Select  
Servers). When the PC started from “Wake On LAN” (WOL), check if the PC complies  
with WOL or if the WOL setup is programmed properly in device manager for BIOS or  
Windows.  
No previously  
connected server(s)  
found (items in Select  
Servers are dimmed)  
• Check the physical connections (hub, router, and cable quality). Please use 100BASE-  
TX for best quality playback and display speed.  
• Check the logical connections (IP Address setup, DHCP, etc.). Confirm the IP Address  
is correct if acquired by Auto IP and Firewall setup. Also check if the IP Address is  
properly acquired with DHCP on the Network Setup screen that follows the HMG Setup  
menu.  
“Failed to acquire a  
list.” appears on the  
Server List screen  
• Using two or more application servers on a single PC may cause unstable operation.  
For proper operation, it is strongly recommended that one application server is used on a  
single PC.  
• Check the PC if its media server is running. Restart if necessary. Check if one or more  
servers are On (this may cause a malfunction).  
• Check if the PC is operating properly. Reboot the PC after confirming its specifications  
and setup values.  
• Check the media server setup. If a client is registered manually, the setup procedure  
may have to be run again. An option “Not Allowed” may be selected for connections.  
• Check if UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) is enabled on your router. Refer to your  
router’s instruction manual for procedures.  
• Wait for a short period then select “Update Server List” from the TOOLS Menu.  
• Check for radio interference when connected using a wireless LAN. Radio interference  
may cause the connection to fail.  
• If the above does not solve the problem, try turning TV a off on the remote control unit  
then turn a on on the flat panel TV.  
An available server is  
selected but cannot be  
navigated  
• Check if the server is correctly set up for file sharing, if the target folder has been  
deleted, or if one or more folders have been corrupted on the server.  
• Check if there are too many files in each folder.  
A server is arbitrarily  
selected  
• This arbitrary selection happens when the server you used before had been set to  
display the Media Navigator menu screen (if you reset it, other servers connected are  
also reset).  
• When ON is selected for Auto Connection on the HMG Setup menu, the server is  
automatically accessed if only one server is connected. Use the TOOLS Menu to select  
the proper server.  
File/folder  
• The Media Navigator displays the server contents as classified by the server.  
configuration differs  
from one server to  
another (strange  
configuration)  
• If no information (such as ID3 tag) is contained in the file, files cannot be classified on  
the server.  
A communication error • Refer to the possible solutions provided previously for “No servers are found.”  
message appears  
• If the above does not solve the problem, try turning TV a off on the remote control then  
turn a on on the flat panel TV.  
127  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Helpful Information  
06  
Home Media Gallery/PLAYBACK  
Issue  
Possible Solutions  
Image or sound is  
interrupted or distorted  
(Block noise appears)  
• Check the physical connections (hub, router, cable quality). Please use 100BASE-TX  
for best quality playback and display speed.  
• Check if the PC is operating properly. Reboot the PC after confirming specifications  
and setup values.  
• Confirm that the file complies to the supported format, bit rate, and/or profile. Also  
check the file for damage.  
• When connected by a wireless LAN, verify that the bit rate is sufficient.  
• Some files that comply with the supported format may not play back or display.  
• Check if the DRM content was purchased for use with another PC. Your flat panel TV  
cannot play DRM content if it has been transferred from the PC on which it was  
purchased to another PC. You can only play DRM content purchased for the PC in use  
at the time of purchase. Please obtain a new license or use the PC for which the  
content was purchased.  
• Check if content on the same server allows multiple client devices (players).  
Cannot play or display  
• Check the physical connections (hub, router and cable quality). Please use 100BASE-  
TX for best quality playback and display speed.  
• Check if the PC is operating properly. Reboot the PC after confirming its specifications  
and setup.  
• Check if the file complies to the supported format, bit rate and/or profile. Also check  
the file for damage.  
• Check if the leasing contract for the server has expired.  
• When connected by a wireless LAN, check if the bit rate is sufficient.  
• Some files that comply with the supported format may not be played back or displayed.  
• It takes time to capture and display a large-sized image. If this is the case, no operation  
may be performed.  
• Check if the DRM content was purchased for use with another PC. With the flat panel  
TV you cannot play DRM content if it has been transferred from the PC on which it was  
purchased to another PC. You can only play DRM content purchased for the PC in use  
at the time of purchase. Please obtain a new license or use the PC for which the  
content was purchased.  
• Check if content on the same server is played with multiple client devices (players).  
Home Media Gallery/USB  
Issue  
Possible Solutions  
USB devices are not  
properly recognized  
• Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant.  
• Check if it is connected properly, nothing is damaged (power unit, mode such as Mass  
Storage mode and media format, etc.).  
• Check if it contains the supported files.  
• Check if the speed of the device is sufficient (poor device speed may result in  
interrupted or delayed display of images due to a bit-rate problem). When using a  
digital camera that is not Mass Storage Class compliant, insert the Flash Memory card  
into the multi-card reader.  
• Confirm that the device is correctly inserted or removed.  
• No USB hub is supported. When using a home network, connect directly to the  
device’s USB port.  
128  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Helpful Information  
06  
Home Media Gallery/USB  
Issue  
Possible Solutions  
Image or sound is  
interrupted or distorted  
(Block noise appears)  
• Verify that the file complies with the supported format, bit rate and/or profile. Also  
check the file for damage.  
• Some files that comply with the supported format may not play back or display  
properly.  
• Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant.  
• Check if it is connected properly, nothing is damaged (power unit, mode such as Mass  
Storage mode and media format, etc.).  
• Check if it contains the supported files.  
• Check if the speed of the device is sufficient (poor device speed may result in  
interrupted or delayed display of images due to a bit-rate problem). When using a  
digital camera that is not Mass Storage Class compliant, insert the Flash Memory card  
into the multi-card reader.  
An external device  
connected to the USB  
port does not operate  
• Check if the device is connectable to the flat panel TV.  
• Re-insert the USB cable.  
• For connection, use a USB cable shorter than 5 m.  
• Check if the USB cable is properly connected.  
• First turn the power off and then on again to check if the external device works  
correctly.  
• Check if the external device works correctly after the USB device is relaunched.  
• Check if the digital still camera is in viewing mode.  
• Refer to the instruction manual for the digital still camera.  
Photo data stored in a  
digital still camera  
cannot be read  
• Check if the device is connectable to the flat panel TV.  
• Check if the digital still camera is turned on.  
• Check if the digital still camera is in viewing mode.  
through USB interface  
Home Media Gallery/Slide Show  
Issue  
Possible Solutions  
Slideshow (photo  
• Check if the player is in pause, rotation or zoom mode. If it is, press PLAY or ENTER to  
content) doesn’t start  
start the slideshow.  
Next picture does not  
appear in the  
• The time needed to display a picture may be longer than the time set to display in Slide  
Show settings. Reduce the picture size using a PC and try again.  
slideshow  
• Slide Show only displays supported files. If there is only one supported file, that file  
remains on the screen. No other files appear.  
Other  
Issue  
Possible Solutions  
Panel sounds/noises  
• Some sounds are appropriate for plasma technology.  
Examples: fan motor noise, electrical circuit humming, glass panel buzzing, etc.  
Brightness on sides of  
screen are uneven  
• Display content that completely fills the screen until unevenness is minimized.  
• Change the AV mode setting.  
129  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Helpful Information  
06  
If the information above fails to solve the issue, please contact a Pioneer-authorized service representative. Do  
not attempt to service the panel yourself. Opening or removing covers exposes you to possible electrical shock  
and other dangers as well as possibly voiding your warranty. Request a qualified service professional to check you  
flat panel TV.  
Some situations that require a service professional are as follows:  
• panel dropped or damaged  
• power cord or plug damaged  
• liquid spilled or an object dropped into the panel  
• exposed to rain or water  
• noticeable abnormality in panel operation  
Occasionally a part within the flat panel TV may fail. Verify that your service professional uses only replacement  
parts specified by Pioneer or by those with the same characteristics and performance as the original parts. Use  
of unauthorized parts can result in fire, electric shock, or other danger. Upon completion of any service or repair  
work, request that the service professional perform safety checks to ensure that the product is operating properly.  
If you need more assistance or have a Service/Parts-related question, please contact the Pioneer Service  
organization at (800) 421-1625.  
6.4.1 Check the Signal Strength  
When the flat panel TV has a UHF/VHF antenna connected, the signal may be weak. If the image or sound is  
unclear, check the strength of the signal. Follow the steps below to check a channel’s signal strength.  
1 ) Tune to the channel that is fuzzy or with unclear sound.  
2 ) Access the System Setup through the Setup.  
3 ) Select Digital Tuner Setup from the System Setup menu.  
4 ) Select Installation from the Digital Tuner Setup menu.  
5 ) Select Signal Check from the submenu.  
6 ) Select RF Channel.  
To add the channel(s), select Add.  
7 ) Select the channel to be checked.  
8 ) Adjust the direction of the antenna until the current signal strength reaches as close to the maximum signal  
strength as possible.  
RF Channel  
:
21  
Add  
Level : 60%  
Quality : 80%  
9 ) Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
130  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cautions and Warnings  
07  
7 Cautions and Warnings  
Your flat panel TV is designed for a long and productive life. To keep your panel at peak performance, there are a  
few things that can help. This section provides general information and specific warnings to help you maintain  
the flat panel TV at top quality throughout its lifetime.  
Note: If you do not intend to use your flat panel TV for an extended period, occasionally power on and run the  
panel to maintain functionality.  
7.1 Installation Details  
It is best to use parts and accessories designed by Pioneer. Use of accessories other than the Pioneer stand or  
installation bracket may result in instability and could cause injury. For custom installations, please speak with  
your dealer or expert installer before attempting to install your high-end flat panel TV. These professionals are  
familiar with proper installation techniques including ventilation.  
Using the unit without proper ventilation may cause the internal temperature to rise and could result in a possible  
malfunction. When the surrounding environmental or internal temperature exceeds a certain degree, the display  
automatically powers off in order to cool the internal electronics and prevent a hazardous situation.  
A malfunction can be caused by a single issue such as ventilation or by a combination of factors. Pioneer is not  
responsible for accidents or damage caused by using parts and/or accessories manufactured by other  
companies, inadequate installation sites, poor stabilization practices, erroneous installation methods,  
operational mistakes, site remodeling, or natural disasters.  
For more installation information, refer to the following bullet points:  
• Confirm that panel vents are not partially obstructed or completely blocked.  
• Use a vacuum cleaner set to its lowest suction setting to clean dusty vents.  
• Distance the panel from the wall, other equipment, etc. (for minimum space requirements, refer to “2.1.1  
Check the Location for Suitability” ).  
• Do not fit the unit inside of narrow spaces where ventilation is poor.  
• Do not drape, seat, or enclose the panel in any material including blankets, loose cloth, or carpeting as this  
could block the panel vents.  
• Use a proper mount or stand rather than leaning the panel against a wall or other support.  
7.2 Physical Location & Temperature Considerations  
Condensation may form on the surface or inside of the flat panel TV when the panel is moved from a cold place  
to a warm place or just after a heater or air conditioner is switched on. If condensation forms, do not turn on the  
flat panel TV until all moisture evaporates. Powering on the display when there is condensation may cause the  
panel to malfunction.  
7.3 Usage Guidelines  
For maximum enjoyment of your Pioneer flat panel TV, read the following information carefully.  
Over the course of the flat panel TV’s lifetime, as with all phosphor-based screens including standard tube-type  
TVs, the luminosity of the screen diminishes very slowly. Also, static pictures shown over an extended period can  
adversely affect the screen image. To enjoy bright and beautiful pictures for many years to come, please apply the  
following guidelines.  
• Set the flat panel TV to Standby when it is not being used.  
• Avoid leaving a still image or frequently showing the same picture on the screen (e.g. closed-captioned  
images, games with static portions, etc.).  
• Hide the On Screen Display (OSD) from a DVD player, VCR, or other device when not in use.  
• Do not leave a picture freeze-framed or paused for long periods.  
• Avoid showing a picture with very bright and very dark areas on the screen for extended lengths to time.  
• Activate the GAME mode on the AV Selection submenu to play a game but try to limit using this mode for  
more than two hours at a time.  
131  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Cautions and Warnings  
07  
• View full-motion, high-action video in WIDE or FULL screen after playing a game or showing a still/PC image.  
The recommended duration for showing the action video is three times as long as the game or PC image  
was on the screen.  
• View full-motion video in WIDE or FULL screen after playing content with side, top, or bottom masking (black  
bars). Extensive viewing of masked content without this recovery process can cause uneven wear on the  
plasma cells.  
7.4 Signal Interference or Noise  
Signal interference, also referred to as video noise or white noise, can be caused by many different situations.  
The most common are addressed in the following sections.  
Infrared rays  
The flat panel TV releases infrared rays because of its characteristics. Depending on how the flat panel TV is used,  
remote controls for nearby equipment may be adversely affected. Wireless headphones using infrared rays can  
experience noise interference. If this is the case, move equipment to a location where its remote control sensor  
is not affected.  
Radio Signals  
While this flat panel TV meets the required specifications, it can affect the signals for surrounding equipment. If  
your radio, PC, VCR, or other electrical equipment is disrupted by the panel, move the equipment away from the  
panel.  
Flat Panel TV Motor  
The screen of the flat panel TV is composed of extremely fine pixels that emit light according to received video  
signals. This principle may cause you to hear a slight buzz or electrical hum coming from the panel. This is a  
normal sound for the flat panel TV and does not indicate a failing unit.  
Flat Panel TV Fans  
You may hear the sound of a fan motor at times. The slight noise is caused by a cooling fan motor speeding up  
when the ambient temperature of the flat panel TV rises. This is a normal function of the panel and is not a  
malfunction.  
7.5 Phosphor Properties  
The following are typical effects and characteristics of a phosphor-based matrix display and as such are not  
covered by the Warranty:  
• Permanent residual images upon the phosphors of the panel  
• Existence of one or more inactive light cells in small quantity  
• Noises generated by fan motors, electrical circuits (hum), panel plates, etc.  
7.6 Image Information Including Retention & After-Image Lag  
Menu Window Size (after a Video Switch)  
Programs may be high definition (HD) or standard definition (SD). This flat panel TV automatically scales to the  
appropriate definition type. If the video program’s definition type changes while a menu window is on screen (for  
example: HD to SD or SD to HD) the menu size may temporarily shrink or enlarge until the panel finishes  
adjusting the picture. Adjusting may happen, for example, when switching between a TV program and playback  
from a DVR, or when a recorded program switches between different definition types while the menu is showing.  
The menu returns to its normal size after a couple of seconds. This action is normal and does not indicate a  
problem with your flat panel TV.  
Pixel Information  
Plasma screens show picture using pixels. Pioneer flat panel TVs contain a very large number of pixels. The size  
of the panel determines the number of pixels. With the ELITE Series models, there are over 6.2 million pixels in  
the 50”/60” panel. All Pioneer display panels are manufactured using a very high level of ultra-precision  
technology and undergo individual quality control.  
132  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Cautions and Warnings  
07  
In rare cases, some pixels can be permanently switched off, or on, resulting in either a black or colored pixel  
permanently fixed on the screen. This effect is common to all plasma displays because it is a consequence of the  
technology.  
If the defective pixels are visible at the standard viewing distance of between 2.5 and 3.5 meters (8.2 feet and 11.5  
feet) while viewing a normal broadcast (i.e. not a test card, still image, or single color display) please immediately  
contact Pioneer Customer Support (USA) or Customer Satisfaction (CANADA). See inside back cover for contact  
information. If, however, the faulty pixels can only be seen close up or during single color displays then this is  
considered normal for this technology.  
Image Retention (a.k.a. Burn-In)  
Leaving a static picture on screen for several hours can cause a faint imprint of the image. This imprint is known as  
image retention or burn-in. The image may be temporary or permanent. Although caused by different things, image  
retention can occur on all display technologies including LDC, plasma, direct view CRT TVs, and projection TVs.  
On today’s plasma displays, permanent image retention is less of a worry. Most image retention can be improved  
simply by watching something with a lot of action or rapid screen changes. To avoid image retention as much as  
possible, refer to the guidelines below.  
• Change the picture periodically when showing static images, such as a fixed image from a PC or a TV game  
unit, for longer periods.  
• Avoid leaving fixed images such as time of day indicator or channel logos on screen whenever possible.  
• Display content in a wide aspect ratio (no black or gray bars on any side of the content). This flat panel TV is  
equipped with multiple wide-screen viewing modes; use one of these modes to fill the entire screen with  
content. View in a wide aspect ratio unless doing so would be a copyright infringement.  
• Set the Side Mask detection function to Mode 1 or Mode 2. High Definition 16:9 aspect ratio images  
containing side masks are detected automatically and side masks are added or the image appears in full-  
screen.  
• Avoid showing dark images after still images for a period of time. In most cases, any image retention caused  
by this sequence can be corrected by displaying bright images for a similar period of time.  
After-Image Lag  
Displaying the same images such as still images for a long time may cause after-image lagging. After-Image Lag  
refers to a ghost of the still image remaining visible after the picture is no longer being shown. This may occur in  
the following cases.  
• After-image lagging due to remaining electric load  
If an image with very high peak luminance is displayed for more than a minute, after-image lagging may  
occur due to the remaining electric load. The ghost-image remaining on the screen disappears when  
moving images are shown. The luminance of the still image and the length of time it was displayed  
determine how long it takes for the ghost image to fade away.  
Avoid displaying the same image on the flat panel TV continuously over a long period. If the same image is  
displayed continuously for several hours, or for shorter periods over several days, a permanent after-image  
may remain on the screen. This after-image is permanent because the fluorescent materials burned.  
Burned images may fade eventually after playing other video sequences but do not disappear completely.  
When a program menu, or frozen image is displayed for up to 10 minutes, the flat panel TV automatically turns  
the image off to prevent the screen from being burned.  
Screen Protection  
Screen Protection simultaneously optimizes the related settings to alleviate image retention. For details, see  
“3.6.2 Extend Your Panel Life.”  
Image Orbiter  
Another built-in feature to protect against burn-in is the Orbiter function. Orbiter automatically changes the  
position of the picture imperceptibly while the image is on screen. For more information about the feature, refer  
to “3.6.3 Turn On the Image Orbiter.”  
133  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Cautions and Warnings  
7.7 Safety Precautions  
07  
Your flat panel TV is engineered and manufactured with one of the highest priorities being safety. However,  
improper use can result in electric shock and/or fire. To avoid danger please follow the instructions below when  
installing, operating, and cleaning your flat panel TV.  
• Read & Retain Instructions – Read all operating and user information provided with your flat panel TV.  
• Environment – Avoid installing the panel in a location with exposure to large quantities of dust, temperature  
extremes, high humidity, direct sunlight, or subject to excessive vibrations or impact shock. Also, never pour  
a liquid or insert an object in to the flat panel TV.  
• Cleaning – See the section above regarding the proper way to clean your flat panel TV.  
• Water & Moisture – Avoid operating or positioning your panel close to water or other sources of liquid. Such  
locations include a bathroom, a kitchen or laundry sink, in a damp basement, by a swimming pool, etc.  
• Power – Turn OFF the panel before connecting any other equipment. Operate the panel only from a grounded  
outlet.  
7.8 Legal Notices  
7.8.1 Safety  
WARNING  
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filled  
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain  
or moisture.  
D3-4-2-1-3_B_En  
WARNING: This product equipped with a three-wire grounding (earthed) plug - a plug that has a  
third (grounding) pin. This plug only fits a grounding-type power outlet. If you are unable to insert  
the plug into an outlet, contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet with a properly grounded  
one. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding plug.  
D3-4-2-1-6_A_En  
WARNING: To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted  
candle) on the equipment.  
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En  
VENTILATION CAUTION:  
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat  
radiation. For the minimum space required, see page 15.  
WARNING: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable  
operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings  
should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by  
operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed.  
134  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Cautions and Warnings  
07  
CAUTION: The switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power  
cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut  
down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily  
unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be  
unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En  
Operating Environment  
Operating environment temperature and humidity:  
+0 ºC to +40 ºC (+32 ºF to +104 ºF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked)  
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight  
(or strong artificial light)  
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En  
7.8.2 Radio Interference  
This digital television is capable of receiving analog basic, digital basic and digital premium cable television  
programming by direct connection to a cable system providing such programming. A security card provided  
by your cable operator is required to view encrypted digital programming. Certain advanced and interactive  
digital cable services such as video-on-demand, a cable operator’s enhanced program guide and data-  
enhanced television services may require the use of a set-top box. For more information call your local cable  
operator.  
Information to User  
Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s right to  
operate the equipment.  
D8-10-2_En  
[For Canadian model]  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
D8-10-1-3_En  
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Product Name: Flat Panel TV  
Model Number: PRO-151FD/PRO-111FD  
Product Category: Class B Personal Computers & Peripherals  
Responsible Party Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS SERVICE, INC.  
Address: 1925 E. DOMINGUEZ ST., LONG BEACH, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.  
Phone: 800-421-1625  
URL: http://www.pioneerelectronics.com  
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following measures:  
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
D8-10-1-2_En  
CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect  
the unit to other equipment. To prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios  
and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections.  
D8-10-3a_En  
135  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
08  
8 Appendix  
8.1 Ratings Charts (for Various Audience Classifications)  
The charts below list the various rating systems recognized by your flat panel TV.  
8.1.1 TV Ratings (age-based)  
Rating  
Description  
TV-Y  
All children  
TV-Y7  
TV-G  
Children seven and above  
General audiences  
TV-PG  
TV-14  
TV-MA  
Parental guidance suggested  
Parents strongly cautioned  
Mature audiences only  
8.1.2 U.S. TV Parental Guideline Ratings (age/category-based)  
Rating Description  
FV  
V
Fantasy Violence  
Violence  
S
Sexual Situations  
Adult Language  
Sexual Dialog  
L
D
8.1.3 MPAA Movie Ratings (age-based)  
Rating  
Description  
N/A  
G
Not applicable for MPAA ratings  
General audiences. All ages admitted.  
PG  
Parental guidance suggested. Some material  
may not be suitable for children.  
PG-13  
R
Parents strongly cautioned. Some material may  
be inappropriate for children under 13.  
Restricted. Under 17 requires accompanying  
parent or adult guardian (age varies in some  
jurisdictions).  
NC-17  
NR  
No one 17 and under admitted.  
Not rated  
136  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Appendix  
08  
8.1.4 Canadian - English Ratings (age-based)  
Rating  
Description  
E
News, sports, documentaries, other information  
programming, talk shows, music videos, variety  
programming  
(exempt)  
C
For younger children under the age of eight years;  
pays close attention to themes that could  
(children)  
threaten their sense of security and well-being  
C8+  
(children over 8)  
Contains no portrayal of violence as the preferred,  
acceptable, or only way to resolve conflict; nor  
encourages children to imitate dangerous acts  
they may see on the screen  
G
Acceptable for all age groups; contains very little  
violence, physical, verbal or emotional  
(general)  
PG  
For general audience but may not be suitable for  
younger children (under the age of eight); could  
contain controversial themes or issues  
(parental guidance)  
14+  
Contains themes where violence is one of the  
dominant elements of the storyline but it must be  
integral to the development of plot or character;  
language usage could be profane; limited nudity  
present within the context of the theme  
(children over 14)  
18+  
(adults)  
Contains depictions of violence related to the  
development of plot, character or themes  
intended for adult viewing; could contain graphic  
language and portrayals of sex and nudity  
8.1.5 Canadian - French Ratings (age-based)  
Rating  
Description  
E
News, sports, documentaries, other information  
programming, talk shows, music videos, variety  
programming  
G
All ages and children, contains minimal direct  
violence, but may be integrated into the plot in a  
humorous or unrealistic manner  
8ans+  
General but inadvisable for young children; may  
be viewed by a wide public audience but could  
contain scenes disturbing to children under eight  
who cannot distinguish between imaginary and  
real situations; view with parent  
13ans+  
16ans+  
18ans+  
Contains scenes of frequent violent scenes and  
therefore recommended for viewing with parent  
Contains frequent violent scenes and intense  
violence  
Only for adult viewing; contains frequent violent  
scenes and extreme violence  
137  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
08  
8.2 Manufacturer Codes to Program into the Remote Control  
8.2.1 Cable  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
GMI  
0883  
GoldStar  
0144  
Hitachi  
0003, 0008  
Insight  
0476, 0810  
Jerrold  
0476, 0810,  
0276, 0003  
Memorex  
0000  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Torx  
0003  
Toshiba  
0000  
A-Mark  
0008,0144  
ABC  
0237, 0003,  
0008  
Accuphase  
0003  
Acorn  
0237  
Action  
0237  
Active  
0237  
Americast  
0899  
Archer  
0237, 0260  
BCC  
0276  
Bell South  
0899  
Century  
0008  
Clearmaster  
0883  
ClearMax  
0883  
Cool Box  
0883  
Coolmax  
0883  
Digeo  
1187  
Director  
0476  
Pace  
Regal  
0276  
Runco  
0000  
Samsung  
0003, 0144,  
0023  
Scientific  
Atlanta  
1877, 0877,  
0477, 0237,  
0003, 0000,  
0008  
Sony  
1006  
Sprucer  
0144  
Starcom  
0003  
Supercable  
0276  
Supermax  
0883  
Thomson  
1256  
1877, 0877,  
0237, 0008  
Panasonic  
0000, 0008,  
0144, 0107  
Paragon  
0000, 0008, 0525  
Penney  
Tristar  
0883  
United Cable  
0276, 0003  
US Electronics  
0276, 0003,  
0008  
V2  
0883  
Videoway  
0000  
Viewmaster  
0883  
Vision  
0883  
Vortex View  
0883  
Zenith  
0000  
Philips  
1305, 0317  
Pioneer  
1877, 0877,  
0144, 0533,  
0023, 0260,  
1021  
Pulsar  
0000  
Quasar  
0000  
Mitsubishi  
0003  
Fosgate  
0276  
GE  
Motorola  
1376, 0476,  
0810, 0276,  
1187, 1106  
Multitech  
0883  
Nova Vision  
0008  
Novaplex  
0008  
0144  
General  
Instrument  
0476, 0810,  
0276, 0003  
Gibralter  
0003  
RadioShack  
0883  
RCA  
British Telecom  
0003  
0000, 0525,  
0899  
1256  
8.2.2 Satellite  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Bell ExpressVu  
0775, 1170  
Chaparral  
0216  
Dishpro  
1505, 0775,  
1775  
HTS  
Mitsubishi  
0749  
Motorola  
0869, 0856  
Netsat  
0099  
Next Level  
0869  
Panasonic  
0247, 0701  
Pansat  
0647, 1807  
Philips  
1142, 0749,  
1749, 0775,  
0819, 1076,  
0722, 0099,  
1442  
Pioneer  
1142, 0329,  
1442  
Proscan  
0392, 0566  
RadioShack  
0566, 0775,  
0869  
Star Trak  
0869  
Thomson  
0392, 0566  
TiVo  
1142, 1442,  
1443, 1444,  
1538  
Toshiba  
0749, 1749,  
0790, 0819,  
1285  
UltimateTV  
1392  
Ultrasat  
1806  
Uniden  
0722  
Voom  
0775, 1775  
Hughes  
Network  
Systems  
1142, 0749,  
1749, 1442,  
1443, 1444,  
1538  
Humax  
1790, 1781  
Innova  
0099  
Jerrold  
0869  
Echostar  
1505, 0775,  
1170, 1775  
Expressvu  
0775, 1775  
Fortec Star  
1550, 1821,  
1948  
Funai  
1377  
GE  
0392, 0566  
General  
Instrument  
0869  
Coolsat  
1806, 2147  
Crossdigital  
1109  
RCA  
0392, 0566,  
1142, 0775,  
0855, 0143,  
1392, 1442  
Samsung  
1377, 1142,  
1276, 1108,  
1109, 1442,  
1609  
Sanyo  
1219  
SKY  
0856, 0099  
Sony  
DirecTV  
1377, 0392,0566,  
0639, 1639,  
1142, 0247,  
0749, 1749,  
0819, 1856,  
1076, 1108,  
0099, 1109,  
1392, 1414,  
1442, 1443,  
1444, 1538, 1609  
Dish Network  
System  
JVC  
0775, 1170,  
1775  
GOI  
LG  
0775, 1775  
Hitachi  
0749, 0819,  
1250  
Houston  
0775  
1226, 1414  
Magnavox  
0722  
McIntosh  
0869  
0869  
Zenith  
0856, 1856,  
1810  
0639, 1639  
Star Choice  
0869  
1505, 0775,  
1170, 1775  
Primestar  
0869  
138  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix  
08  
8.2.3 VCR (Brands A - F)  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
A-Mark  
Allegro  
Bell ExpressVu  
1944  
Classic  
0037  
Daytron  
0037, 0278  
DBX  
0040, 0050  
Dell  
Electrophonic  
0037  
Emerald  
0184, 0121  
Emerex  
0037, 0240,  
0000, 0278, 0046  
ABS  
1972  
Accurian  
0000  
Admiral  
0060, 0048,  
0039, 0047,  
0104, 0209,  
0479  
Adventura  
0037, 0240,  
0000  
Adyson  
0072  
Aiko  
0278  
Aiwa  
0037, 0000,  
0124, 0307,  
1137, 0468  
Akai  
0041, 0175  
Alba  
0209, 0072,  
0278  
Alienware  
1972  
0039, 1137  
America Action  
0278  
American High  
0035, 0081  
Amstrad  
0000  
Anam National  
0226  
Asha  
Broksonic  
0184, 0121,  
0209, 0002,  
0479, 1815  
Calix  
0037  
Candle  
0037, 0038  
Canon  
0035  
Capehart  
0002  
Captive Works  
2167  
Carrera  
0240  
Carver  
0035, 0081  
CCE  
0072, 0278  
Cineral  
0278  
CineVision  
1137  
Colortyme  
0060, 0035,  
0045, 0278  
Colt  
0000, 0072  
Craig  
0037, 0047,  
0240, 0072  
Criterion  
0000, 0072  
Crosley  
1972  
Denon  
0032  
Emerson  
0037, 0184,  
0240, 0000,  
0121, 0043,  
0209, 0002,  
0278, 0479,  
0593, 1593  
ESA  
0081, 0042  
Derwent  
0041  
DirecTV  
0739, 0740  
Dish Network  
System  
1944  
Dishpro  
1944  
0240  
Astra  
0035, 0240  
Audio Dynamics  
0040  
Audio-Technica  
0058  
Audiovox  
0037, 0278,  
0038  
0035, 0081,  
0000  
Crown  
1137  
Expressvu  
1944  
0072, 0278  
Curtis Mathes  
0060, 0035,  
0162, 0240,  
0000, 0041,  
0278, 0432  
Cybernex  
0240  
CyberPower  
1972  
Daewoo  
0037, 0045,  
0278, 0046,  
1137  
Dual  
0000  
Dumont  
0040  
Fisher  
0039, 0047,  
0000, 0104,  
0046  
Fuji  
0035, 0033  
Fujitsu  
0000  
Funai  
0037, 0000,  
0072, 0278,  
0593, 1593  
Avis  
Durabrand  
0039, 0038  
Dynatech  
0240, 0000  
Echostar  
1944  
Electrohome  
0060, 0037,  
0240, 0000,  
0043, 0209  
0000, 0072  
Beaumark  
0240  
Bell & Howell  
0035, 0048,  
0039, 0000,  
0104, 0046,  
0479  
Citizen  
0035, 0037,  
0240, 0000,  
0209, 0278,  
0479  
139  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
08  
8.2.4 VCR (Brands G - O)  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
NEC  
0104, 0067,  
0041, 0038,  
0040, 0050  
New Tech  
0072  
Garrard  
0000  
Gateway  
1972  
Headquarter  
0046  
Hewlett  
Packard  
1972  
HI-Q  
0035, 0047,  
0000  
Hitachi  
0035, 0037,  
0045, 0000,  
0042, 0041,  
0089  
Howard  
Computers  
1972  
HP  
1972  
HTS  
1944  
Hughes  
Network  
Systems  
0042, 0739,  
0740  
Humax  
0739, 1797,  
1988  
Jensen  
0067, 0041  
JVC  
0067, 0041,  
0058, 1162  
1944  
M Electronic  
0240  
Metz  
0037  
MGA  
0060, 0240,  
0043  
MGN  
Technology  
0240  
Microsoft  
1972  
Midland  
0240  
Mind  
1972  
Minolta  
0042  
Mitsubishi  
0060, 0048,  
0047, 0000,  
0042, 0067,  
0043, 0041,  
0173  
Motorola  
0035, 0048,  
1843  
Magnasonic  
0037, 0240,  
0000, 0072,  
0278, 0593  
Magnavox  
0035, 0037,  
0048, 0039,  
0081, 0240,  
0000, 0226,  
0563, 0593,  
0618, 1593  
Magnin  
0240  
Marantz  
0035, 0081,  
0038  
Marta  
GE  
0060, 0035,  
0048, 0240,  
0000  
Gemini  
0060  
Genexxa  
0037, 0000,  
0278  
Go Video  
0240, 0432,  
0526, 0614,  
1137, 1873  
GOI  
KEC  
Nikko  
0037, 0278  
Kenwood  
0067, 0041,  
0038, 0046  
KLH  
0072  
Kodak  
0035, 0037  
KTV  
0000  
0037, 0278  
Nikkodo  
0037, 0278  
Nishi  
0240  
Niveus Media  
1972  
Noblex  
0240  
Northgate  
1972  
Olympus  
0035, 0162,  
0104, 0226  
Onkyo  
LG  
1944  
0037, 0240,  
0038, 1037,  
1137, 2010  
Linksys  
1972  
Lloyd’s  
0240, 0000,  
0072, 0038,  
0040  
Loewe  
0081  
Logik  
0240, 0000,  
0072  
GoldStar  
0035, 0037,  
0039, 0000,  
0278, 0038,  
1137  
Goodmans  
0037, 0081,  
0000, 0072,  
0278  
0037  
Matsui  
0037, 0209  
Matsushita  
0035, 0162,  
0081, 1162  
Media Center  
PC  
1972  
MEI  
0035  
Memorex  
0035, 0162,  
0037, 0048,  
0039, 0047,  
0240, 0000,  
0104, 0209,  
0072, 0278,  
0046, 0307,  
0479, 1037,  
1162  
0222  
Optimus  
1062, 0035,  
0162, 0037,  
0048, 0047,  
0240, 0000,  
0104, 0058,  
0432, 0593,  
1162  
Movie Walker  
0072  
MTC  
0240, 0000,  
0072  
MTX  
Gradiente  
0000  
Hush  
1972  
Hytek  
0047, 0000,  
0072  
Granada  
0081, 0042  
Grundig  
0081, 0226  
Harley Davidson  
0000  
Harman/Kardon  
0081, 0038  
Harvard  
0072  
0000  
Orion  
Lumatron  
0278  
Luxor  
0046  
LXI  
Multitech  
0039, 0000,  
0072  
NAD  
0240, 0104,  
0058  
0184, 0240,  
0000, 0104,  
0121, 0209,  
0002, 0278,  
0479  
iBUYPOWER  
1972  
Instant Replay  
0035, 0226  
ITT Nokia  
0240, 0041  
Janeil  
0037, 0000,  
0042, 0067  
Harwood  
0072  
0240  
140  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
08  
8.2.5 VCR (Brands P - V)  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Panama  
0035  
Proscan  
0060  
Protec  
0000, 0072  
Protech  
0072  
Pulsar  
0039, 0240,  
0278  
Pulser  
0240  
Quarter  
0046  
Quartz  
0035, 0047,  
0046  
Quasar  
0035, 0162,  
0002, 0226,  
1162  
RadioShack  
0035, 0162,  
0037, 0048,  
0047, 0240,  
0000, 0104,  
0046, 1037,  
1162  
ReplayTV  
0614, 0616  
Ricavision  
1972  
Rio  
1137  
Shintom  
0039, 0240,  
0000, 0072  
Shogun  
0240  
Siemens  
0037, 0104  
Signature  
0060, 0035,  
0037, 0048,  
0000, 0046,  
0479  
Singer  
0037, 0240,  
0072  
Sonic Blue  
0614, 0616,  
1137  
Sonographe  
0046  
Symphonic  
0240, 0000,  
0002, 0593,  
1593  
Systemax  
1972  
Tagar Systems  
1972  
Tandy  
TNIX  
0037  
Tocom  
0240  
Toshiba  
0240, 0045,  
0000, 0043,  
0209, 0041,  
1008, 1972,  
1996, 1988  
Tosonic  
0278  
Totevision  
0037, 0240  
Touch  
1972  
Trix  
0037  
Ultra  
0045, 0278  
Unitech  
0240  
Vector  
0045  
Vector Research  
0184, 0038,  
0040  
Vextra  
0072  
Victor  
0067, 0041  
Video Concepts  
0045, 0040  
Videomagic  
0037  
Videosonic  
0240, 0000,  
0072  
Viewsonic  
1972  
Villain  
0000  
Voodoo  
1972  
Panasonic  
1062, 0035,  
0162, 0000,  
0225, 0226,  
0614, 0616,  
1162  
Runco  
0039  
Penney  
Samsung  
0060, 0240,  
0045, 0000,  
0038, 0432,  
0739  
Samtron  
0240  
Sanky  
0035, 0162,  
0037, 0047,  
0081, 0240,  
0000, 0042,  
0067, 0038,  
0040  
Pentax  
0042  
Philco  
0000, 0104  
Tashiko  
0037  
Tatung  
0048, 0081,  
0000, 0067,  
0041  
Teac  
0000, 0067,  
0041  
Technics  
0035, 0162,  
0037, 0000  
Teknika  
0035, 0037,  
0000  
Telecorder  
0240  
Telefunken  
0041  
0048, 0039  
Sansui  
0035, 0081,  
0000, 0209,  
0479  
0240, 0000,  
0067, 0209,  
0041, 0072,  
0002, 0479  
Sanyo  
0047, 0240,  
0000, 0104,  
0046, 0159,  
0479  
Sony  
Philips  
0035, 0047,  
0032, 0033,  
0000, 0067,  
0046, 0226,  
0275, 0636,  
1032, 1702,  
1703, 1896,  
1972  
Soundmaster  
0000  
Stack 9  
1972  
Star Choice  
1843  
0035, 0162,  
0048, 0081,  
0045, 0000,  
0209, 0616,  
0618, 0739,  
1081, 1181,  
1818  
Pilot  
0037  
Pioneer  
0162, 0081,  
0042, 0067,  
0058, 0168,  
1337, 1803  
Polk Audio  
0081  
Portland  
0278  
Presidian  
1593  
Radix  
0037  
Randex  
0037  
Scott  
0184, 0045,  
0121, 0043  
Sears  
Tevion  
0479  
RCA  
0060, 0035,  
0162, 0037,  
0048, 0039,  
0047, 0033,  
0045, 0000,  
0042, 0104,  
0067, 0043,  
0209, 0041,  
0072, 0046,  
0058  
Thomas  
0000, 0002  
Thomson  
0060, 0041  
Tisonic  
0278  
TiVo  
0618, 0636,  
0739, 0740,  
1337, 1944,  
1996  
0060, 0035,  
0048, 0240,  
0045, 0000,  
0042, 0880,  
0058  
Realistic  
0035, 0162,  
0037, 0048,  
0047, 0240,  
0000, 0104,  
0121, 0278,  
0046, 1162  
STS  
0042  
SV2000  
0000, 0072  
SVA  
0000  
Sharp  
Sylvania  
0035, 0081,  
0000, 0043,  
0593, 1593  
Profitronic  
0240  
0048, 0047,  
0032, 0000,  
1875  
TMK  
0240, 0000  
8.2.6 VCR (Brands W - Z)  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Wards  
0042, 0043,  
0041, 0072,  
0038, 0046,  
0058, 0479  
Wharfedale  
0593  
White  
World  
0209, 0002,  
0479  
XR-1000  
0035, 0240,  
0000, 0072  
Yamaha  
0041, 0038  
Zenith  
0037, 0039,  
0033, 0000,  
0209, 0041,  
0278, 0479,  
1137, 1709  
ZT Group  
1972  
0060, 0035,  
0037, 0048,  
0047, 0081,  
0033, 0240,  
0045, 0000,  
Westinghouse  
0000, 0209,  
0072, 0278,  
0479  
141  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
08  
8.2.7 PVR  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Pioneer  
1337, 1803  
RCA  
ABS  
1972  
Alienware  
1972  
Bell ExpressVu  
1944  
Captive Works  
2167  
CyberPower  
1972  
Dell  
1972  
DirecTV  
0739, 0740  
Dish Network  
System  
1944  
Echostar  
1944  
Expressvu  
1944  
Gateway  
1972  
Go Video  
0614, 1873  
GOI  
1944  
Hewlett Packard  
1972  
Howard  
Computers  
1972  
Hughes  
Network  
Systems  
0739, 0740  
Humax  
0739, 1797  
1988  
Hush  
1972  
iBUYPOWER  
1972  
JVC  
1944  
LG  
2010  
Linksys  
1972  
Media Center  
PC  
1972  
Microsoft  
1972  
Mind  
1972  
Motorola  
1843  
Niveus Media  
1972  
Northgate  
1972  
Tagar Systems  
1972  
TiVo  
0618, 0636,  
0739, 1337  
0740  
Toshiba  
1008, 1972,  
1996, 1988  
Touch  
1972  
Viewsonic  
1972  
Voodoo  
1972  
Zenith  
0880  
ReplayTV  
0614, 0616  
Samsung  
0739  
Sharp  
1875  
Sonic Blue  
0614, 0616  
Sony  
0636, 1972  
Stack 9  
1972  
Star Choice  
1843  
Systemax  
1972  
Panasonic  
0614, 0616  
Philips  
0618, 0739  
1818  
HP  
1972  
HTS  
1944  
1709  
ZT Group  
1972  
Dish Pro  
1944  
8.2.8 BD (HD-DVD)  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Pioneer  
2052, 0142  
RCA  
LG  
Panasonic  
1641  
Philips  
2084  
Samsung  
0199  
Sony  
Toshiba  
1769  
0741  
Onkyo  
1769  
1769  
1516  
8.2.9 DVD-R  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Accurian  
0675, 1416  
Apex Digital  
1056  
Aspire Digital  
1168  
Astar  
1489  
Broksonic  
1419  
Citizen  
Coby  
1086  
Go Video  
0741, 1158,  
1304, 1730  
iLo  
1348  
JVC  
1275  
LG  
0741  
Magnavox  
0646, 0675,  
1506  
Panasonic  
0490  
Philips  
0646, 1340  
Pioneer  
Polaroid  
1086, 2130  
Presidian  
1738  
RCA  
0522  
Samsung  
0490, 1470  
Sensory  
Science  
1158  
Sharp  
0675  
Sony  
1033, 1070,  
1431  
Sylvania  
0675  
Toshiba  
1510, 1588  
Zenith  
0741  
CyberHome  
1129, 1502  
Digital Max  
1738  
Electrohome  
2116  
0631, 1460,  
1475,  
1476, 1512  
Funai  
0675, 1334  
Gateway  
1073, 1158  
LiteOn  
1158, 1416,  
1440, 1738  
2116  
142  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix  
08  
8.2.10 DVD (Brands A - N)  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
3D LAB  
0503, 0539  
Accurian  
0675, 1072,  
1416, 1737  
Acoustic  
Solutions  
0730  
Bel Canto  
Design  
Cytron  
Fisher  
IRT  
Magnavox  
0503, 0539,  
0646, 0675,  
1268, 1354,  
1472, 1506  
Malata  
0782, 1159  
Marantz  
0503, 0539,  
0675  
Mclntosh  
1533, 1273  
Medion  
0651  
McIntosh  
Memorex  
0695, 0831,  
1270  
0705  
0670  
0783  
1571  
D-Link  
1881  
Funai  
0675, 1268,  
1334  
Gateway  
1073, 1077,  
1158  
GE  
0522, 0815,  
0717  
Go Video  
0573, 0744,  
0717, 1730,  
1304, 1158,  
1144, 1099,  
1075, 1044,  
0869, 0833,  
0783, 0741,  
0715  
Jaton  
Blaupunkt  
0717  
Blue Parade  
0571  
1078  
Daewoo  
0784, 0705,  
0770, 0833,  
0869, 1169,  
1172, 1234,  
1242, 1441  
Dansai  
0770  
JBL  
0702  
JMB  
Blue Sky  
0695, 0699  
Bose  
0695  
Adcom  
JSI  
1094  
1423  
Afreey  
2023  
JVC  
0698  
Brandt  
0558, 0623,  
0867, 1275,  
1550, 1602  
jWin  
Aiwa  
0651  
Daytek  
0872  
0641  
Broksonic  
0695, 1419  
CaliforniaAudio  
Labs  
Akai  
Decca  
0695, 0705,  
0770, 1089  
Alba  
0770  
1049, 1051  
Kawasaki  
0790  
Kenwood  
0490, 0534,  
0682, 0737  
KLH  
0717, 0790,  
1020, 1149  
Kloss  
0533  
Konka  
0711, 0721  
Koss  
0651, 0769,  
0896, 1061,  
1423  
Landel  
0826  
Lasonic  
0627, 0798,  
1173  
Lecson  
1533  
Lenoxx  
1127  
LG  
0591, 0741,  
0869  
LiteOn  
Denon  
0490  
0490, 0634  
Denver  
0778  
0672, 0717  
Alco  
CAVS  
Microsoft  
0522, 1708,  
2083  
1057  
0790  
Celestial  
1020  
Desay  
1407  
Diamond Vision  
1316  
DigitalMax  
1738  
Digitrex  
0672  
Disney  
0675, 1270  
DiViDo  
0705  
Go Vision  
1072  
Allegro  
Minato  
0869  
Centrex  
0672, 1004  
Cinea  
GoldStar  
0741, 0869  
Goodmans  
0790  
0752  
AmphionMedia  
Works  
Mintek  
0839, 0717,  
1472  
0872, 1245  
AMW  
0831  
Cinego  
GPX  
Mitsubishi  
1521, 0521  
Momitsu  
1082  
Mustek  
0730  
Myryad  
0894  
NAD  
0692, 0741  
Naiko  
0770  
Nakamichi  
1222  
NEC  
0785, 0869  
Nesa  
0717  
Next Base  
0826  
NexxTech  
1402  
0872, 1245  
Apex Digital  
0533, 0672,  
0717, 0755,  
0794, 0795,  
0796, 0797,  
1004, 1020,  
1056, 1061  
Arrgo  
1399  
0699, 0769  
Gradiente  
0490, 0651  
Greenhill  
0717  
CineVision  
0876, 0833,  
0869  
Citizen  
1003, 0695,  
1277, 1587,  
2116  
Dual  
0675, 1068,  
1085  
Grundig  
0539, 0705  
Harman/Kardon  
0582, 0702  
Helios  
Clairtone  
0571  
Coby  
0778, 0852,  
1077, 1086,  
1107, 1165,  
1177, 1351,  
1628  
Durabrand  
1127, 2164  
DVD2000  
0521  
Electrohome  
1003, 2116  
Emerson  
0591, 0675,  
1268  
1023  
Aspire Digital  
1168, 1407  
Astar  
2080  
Hello Kitty  
0831  
1489, 1678,  
1679  
Hitachi  
0573, 0664,  
1247, 1664  
Hiteker  
Audiovox  
0717, 0790,  
1041, 1072,  
1121, 1122  
Awa  
Craig  
0831  
Enterprise  
0591  
Entivo  
0672  
Humax  
1588, 1500  
iLo  
1348, 1472  
Initial  
0717, 1472  
Insignia  
1268, 2095,  
2150  
Integra  
0571, 0627  
Creative  
0503, 0539  
Curtis Mathes  
1087  
CyberHome  
0816, 0874,  
1023, 1024,  
1117, 1129,  
1502, 1537  
1058, 1158,  
1416, 1440,  
1656, 1738  
Loewe  
0511, 0741  
Logix  
0783  
0730  
0503, 0539  
Enzer  
Axion  
Nintaus  
1051  
1072  
0770  
B & K  
ESA  
Norcent  
1003, 0872,  
1107, 1265  
Nova  
0655, 0662  
BBK  
1268  
Firstline  
0651  
Magnasonic  
0651, 0675  
1224  
1517  
143  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
08  
8.2.11 DVD (Brands O - Z)  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Onkyo  
0503, 0627,  
1769  
Oppo  
0575, 1224,  
2185  
Optimus  
0571  
OptoMedia  
Electronics  
0896  
Polaroid  
1020, 1061,  
1086, 1245,  
1316, 1478,  
2130  
Polk Audio  
0539  
Portland  
0770  
Presidian  
0675, 1072,  
1738  
Primare  
1618  
Proceed  
0672  
Proscan  
0522  
Prosonic  
0699  
ProVision  
0778  
Qwestar  
0651  
Radionette  
0741  
RadioShack  
0571  
RCA  
0522, 0571,  
0717, 0790,  
0822, 1022,  
1769  
Realistic  
0571  
Revoy  
0699  
Rio  
0869, 2002  
RJTech  
0118, 1360  
Rotel  
0623, 1178  
Rowa  
0823, 1004  
Saba  
0651  
Sampo  
0698, 0752,  
1501  
Samsung  
0298, 0490,  
0573, 0744,  
0199, 0820,  
1044, 1075,  
1470, 2069  
Sansui  
Sharper Image  
1117  
Sherwood  
0633, 0770,  
1043, 1077,  
1889  
Shinsonic  
0533, 0839  
Slim Art  
1268, 1334  
TAG McLaren  
0894  
Tatung  
0770  
Unimax  
0770  
United  
0730  
Universum  
0591  
Urban Concepts  
0503, 0539  
US Logic  
0839  
Teac  
0571, 0717,  
0692, 0790  
Technics  
0490, 0703  
Technika  
0770  
Technosonic  
0730  
Techwood  
0692  
Terapin  
1031  
Tevion  
0651  
Theta Digital  
0571  
Thomson  
0522, 0511  
TiVo  
0784  
SM Electronic  
0730  
V
Oritron  
0651  
1064, 1226  
Venturer  
0790  
Sonic Blue  
0573, 0715,  
0783, 0869,  
1099, 2002  
Sony  
0533, 0772,  
0864, 1033,  
1070, 1431,  
1516, 1533,  
1548, 1633,  
1791, 1824,  
1892, 1903,  
1904, 1934,  
2020, 2043  
Sova  
1122  
Sungale  
1074  
SVA  
0717, 0860,  
1105  
Sylvania  
0675, 1268  
Symphonic  
0675, 0894,  
Palsonic  
0672, 0852  
Panasonic  
0503, 0490,  
0571, 0703,  
1641, 1762  
Philco  
Vizio  
1064, 1226  
Vocopro  
1027, 1360  
Wesder  
0699  
Xbox  
0522, 1708,  
2083  
Yamaha  
0490, 0539,  
0545, 0497,  
0817  
Yamakawa  
0872  
0675  
Philips  
0503, 0539,  
0646, 0675,  
1267, 1340,  
1354, 1846,  
2056, 2084  
Phonotrend  
0699  
PianoDisc  
1024  
Pioneer  
0525, 0571,  
0142, 0631,  
1475, 1476,  
1571, 1460,  
1512, 1902,  
2052  
0695  
Sanyo  
0670, 0675,  
0695, 0873,  
1334  
Schneider  
0783  
Schwaiger  
0752  
Sensory  
Science  
1158  
1503, 1512,  
1588  
Toshiba  
0503, 0573,  
0539, 0695,  
1154, 1503,  
1510, 1588,  
1608, 1769  
Tredex  
Zenith  
0503, 0591,  
0741, 0869  
Zeus  
0784  
Zoece  
Sharp  
0630, 0675,  
0752, 1256  
0800, 0803,  
0804  
Reoc  
0752  
1265  
8.2.12 LD  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Brand/Code  
Pioneer  
Carver  
0064, 0194,  
0323  
Denon  
0059, 0172,  
0241  
Disco Vision  
0023  
Harman/Kardon  
0194  
Hitachi  
NAD  
0059  
NEC  
0286  
Optimus  
0059  
Panasonic  
0204  
Philips  
0064, 0194  
Samsung  
0323  
Sega  
0023  
Sharp  
0001  
Sony  
0193, 0201,  
0270  
Technics  
0204  
Theta Digital  
0194  
Toshiba  
0059  
Victor  
0245  
Wards  
0059  
Yamaha  
0217  
0059, 0023,  
0241, 0463,  
0572, 1274  
Polk Audio  
0194  
Quasar  
0204  
0023, 0395  
Magnavox  
0064, 0194,  
0217, 0241  
Marantz  
0064, 0194  
Mitsubishi  
0059, 0241  
Renaissance  
0323  
144  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
08  
8.3 Specifications  
Flat Panel TV  
PRO-151FD (60”)  
1920 × 1080 pixels  
18 W + 18 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 6 )  
Woofer: 4.8 cm x 13 cm cone type Woofer: 4.8 cm x 13 cm cone type  
PRO-111FD (50”)  
1920 × 1080 pixels  
18 W + 18 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 6 )  
Number of pixels  
Audio Amplifier  
Speaker  
Tweeter: 2.5 cm semidome type  
Tweeter: 2.5 cm semidome type  
Sound Effect  
SRS FOCUS/SRS/SRS TruBass/  
SRS Definition  
SRS FOCUS/SRS/SRS TruBass/  
SRS Definition  
On-Screen Languages  
Power Requirement  
English, French, Spanish  
English, French, Spanish  
120 V AC, 60 Hz, 524 W (0.3 W  
Standby)  
120 V AC, 60 Hz, 436 W (0.2 W  
Standby)  
Weight  
Main unit: 51.0 kg (112.4 lbs)  
Main unit: 33.8 kg (74.5 lbs)  
Stand: 6.1 kg (13.4 lbs) (including Stand: 2.5 kg (5.6 lbs)(including  
bolts)  
bolts)  
Speaker: 4.1 kg (9.0 lbs)  
(including cables, speaker  
brackets and screws)  
Color Sensor: 0.1 kg (0.2 lbs)  
Total: 61.3 kg (135.1 lbs)  
Speaker: 3.6 kg (7.9 lbs)  
(including cables, speaker  
brackets and screws)  
Color Sensor: 0.1 kg (0.2 lbs)  
Total: 39.9 kg (88.0 lbs)  
Reception System  
Digital  
ATSC Digital TV system  
8VSB/64QAM/256QAM  
Circuit Type  
Tuner VHF/UHF VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69  
Tuner CATV  
Ch. 2 to 135  
Audio format  
Dolby Digital  
Analog  
American TV standard NTSC system  
Circuit Type  
Video signal detection PLL full synchronous detection, PLL digital  
Synthesizer system  
Tuner VHF/UHF VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69  
Tuner CATV  
Cable Ch. 1 to 135 Air Ch. 1 to 125  
BTSC system  
Audio  
multiplex  
Terminals - Side  
INPUT 3  
INPUT 7  
PHONES  
USB  
VIDEO in, AUDIO in  
HDMI in*  
16 to 32 recommended  
USB in**  
145  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Appendix  
08  
Terminals - Rear  
ANT  
75 UNBAL, F Type for DTV/VHF/UHF/CATV in  
INPUT 1  
S-VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in  
INPUT 2  
COMPONENT VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in  
INPUT 4  
HDMI in*, AUDIO in  
PC INPUT  
Analog RGB in, AUDIO in  
COLOR SENSOR  
1
INPUT 5  
HDMI in*, AUDIO in  
INPUT 6  
HDMI in*  
AUDIO OUT  
IR REPEATER OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
ETHERNET  
AUDIO out (Fixed)  
1
Optical  
1
CONTROL OUT  
SPEAKERS  
1
6 to 16 Ω  
SUB WOOFER OUT Variable  
* conforms to HDMI1.3 (Deep Color) and HDCP1.1  
** conforms to USB 1.1 and 2.0  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a digital interface that handles both video and audio using a  
single cable.  
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a technology used to protect copyrighted digital contents  
that use the Digital Visual Interface (DVI).  
Note: Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
Dimensions  
PRO-151FD (60” panel)  
1677 (66-1/32)  
PRO-111FD (50” panel)  
1445 (56-7/8)  
93 (3-21/32)  
93 (3-21/32)  
922 (36-5/16)  
430 (16-15/16)  
75  
(2-31/32)  
552 (21-23/32)  
350 (13-25/32)  
75  
(2-31/32)  
146  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
License  
[MPEG4IP]  
This software is based in part on Mozilla Public License 1.1 see http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/ for information.  
[OpenSSL]  
OpenSSL License  
Copyright © 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following  
acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL  
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”.  
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products  
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-  
core@openssl.org.  
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSLnor may “OpenSSLappear in their names  
without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.  
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes  
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR  
ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR  
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON  
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR  
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes  
software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).  
Original SSLeay License  
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)  
All rights reserved.  
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was  
written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long  
as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found  
in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation  
included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson  
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).  
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this  
package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.  
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided  
with the package.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
147  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following  
acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”  
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic  
related:-).  
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code)  
you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson  
(tjh@cryptsoft.com)”  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,  
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,  
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN  
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be  
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU  
Public Licence.]  
[tiff]  
Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler  
Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS-IS” AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR  
OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES  
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE  
USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.  
[Howl]  
Copyright © 2003, 2004 Porchdog Software All rights reserved.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE  
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,  
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF  
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN  
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
This software is based in part on Apple Public Source License or the recent’s rights thereunder see http://  
developer.apple.com/ for information.  
[libupnp]  
Copyright © 2000-2003 Intel Corporation  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
148  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
* Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote  
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL  
INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR  
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON  
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR  
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
[JPEG image compression]  
If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must state that “this software is  
based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group”.  
[libpng]  
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:  
If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence. libpng versions 1.2.6,  
August 15, 2004, through 1.2.25, February 18, 2008, are Copyright © 2004, 2006-2008 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and  
are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added  
to the list of Contributing Authors  
Cosmin Truta  
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright © 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-  
Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following  
individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors  
Simon-Pierre Cadieux  
Eric S. Raymond  
Gilles Vollant  
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:  
There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is no  
warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided  
with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.  
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright © 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-  
Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following  
individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:  
Tom Lane  
Glenn Randers-Pehrson  
Willem van Schaik  
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright © 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed  
according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of  
Contributing Authors:  
John Bowler  
Kevin Bracey  
Sam Bushell  
Magnus Holmgren  
Greg Roelofs  
Tom Tanner  
149  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright © 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group  
42, Inc.  
For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Contributing Authors” is defined as the following set of  
individuals:  
Andreas Dilger  
Dave Martindale  
Guy Eric Schalnat  
Paul Schmidt  
Tim Wegner  
The PNG Reference Library is supplied “AS IS”. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all  
warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fitness  
for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,  
special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even  
if advised of the possibility of such damage.  
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any  
purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions:  
1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.  
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source.  
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution.  
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of this source  
code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a  
product, acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated.  
A “png_get_copyright” function is available, for convenient use in “about” boxes and the like:  
printf(“%s”,png_get_copyright(NULL)); Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files  
“pngbar.png” and “pngbar.jpg”(88x31) and “pngnow.png” (98x31).  
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the Open  
Source Initiative.  
Glenn Randers-Pehrson  
glennrp at users.sourceforge.net  
February 18, 2008  
[zlib]  
This software is based in part on zlib see http://www.zlib.net for information.  
[FreeType]  
The FreeType Project is Copyright © 1996-2000 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights  
reserved except as specified below. THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF  
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS  
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE,  
OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.  
[GIFLIB]  
The GIFLIB distribution is Copyright © 1997 Eric S. Raymond  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR  
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER  
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.  
150  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
[TinyLogin]  
This software is Copyright 1988 - 1994, Julianne Frances Haugh. All rights reserved.  
[portmap]  
Copyright © Sun Microsystems, Inc.  
Sun RPC is a product of Sun Microsystems, Inc. and is provided for unrestricted use provided that this legend is  
included on all tape media and as a part of the software program in whole or part. Users may copy or modify Sun  
RPC without charge, but are not authorized to license or distribute it to anyone else except as part of a product  
or program developed by the user or with the express written consent of Sun Microsystems, Inc.  
SUN RPC IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF  
DESIGN, MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF  
DEALING, USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE.  
Sun RPC is provided with no support and without any obligation on the part of Sun Microsystems, Inc. to assist  
in its use, correction, modification or enhancement.  
SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE INFRINGEMENT OF  
COPYRIGHTS, TRADE SECRETS OR ANY PATENTS BY SUN RPC OR ANY PART THEREOF.  
In no event will Sun Microsystems, Inc. be liable for any lost revenue or profits or other special, indirect and  
consequential damages, even if Sun has been advised of the possibility of such damages.  
Sun Microsystems, Inc.  
2550 Garcia Avenue  
Mountain View, California 94043  
[libpcap]  
Copyright © 2000 Torsten Landschoff <torsten@debian.org>  
Sebastian Krahmer <krahmer@cs.uni-potsdam.de>  
License: BSD  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. The names of the authors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without  
specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,  
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE.  
[libmpeg1]  
Copyright © 1992 The Regents of the University of California  
Copyright © 1994-1999 Gregory P. Ward <gward@python.net>  
All rights reserved.  
This software is supplied without even the faintest shred of assurance that it works in its entirety.  
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose, without fee,  
and without written agreement is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and the following two  
paragraphs appear in all copies of this software.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION,  
EVEN IF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
THE AUTHOR SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF ERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED  
151  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
HEREUNDER IS ON AN “AS IS” BASIS, AND THE AUTHOR HAS NO BLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE,  
SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.  
[GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE]  
Version 2, June 1991  
Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA  
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not  
allowed.  
Preamble  
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the  
GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software - to make  
sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software  
Foundation’s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software  
Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your  
programs, too.  
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed  
to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you  
wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of  
it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.  
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to  
surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the  
software, or if you modify it.  
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients  
all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must  
show them these terms so they know their rights.  
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you  
legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.  
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no  
warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients  
to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the  
original authors’ reputations.  
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that  
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary.  
To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at  
all.  
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.  
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION  
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder  
saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any  
such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work  
under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with  
modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation  
in the term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”. Activities other than copying, distribution and  
modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not  
restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the  
Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what  
the Program does.  
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium,  
provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and  
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;  
and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a  
152  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange  
for a fee.  
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the  
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that  
you also meet all of these conditions:  
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the  
date of any change.  
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from  
the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms  
of this License.  
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started  
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including  
an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a  
warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to  
view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such  
an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These  
requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived  
from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then  
this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But  
when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the  
distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees  
extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the  
intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent  
is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In  
addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work  
based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work  
under the scope of this License.  
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable  
form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:  
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed  
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,  
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more  
than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the  
corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium  
customarily used for software interchange; or, it linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is  
what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.  
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.  
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in  
object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for  
a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work,  
complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface  
definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as  
a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in  
either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating  
system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If  
distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then  
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the  
source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.  
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this  
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will  
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,  
from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full  
compliance.  
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you  
permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if  
you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the  
153  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,  
distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.  
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically  
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms  
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted  
herein.  
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.  
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not  
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that  
contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you  
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent  
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license  
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly  
through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from  
distribution of the Program.  
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance  
of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.  
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to  
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free  
software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made  
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent  
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software  
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make  
thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.  
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by  
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an  
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in  
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the  
body of this License.  
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time  
to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new  
problems or concerns.  
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this  
License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions  
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not  
specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software  
Foundation.  
10.If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are  
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software  
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will  
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting  
the sharing and reuse of software generally.  
NO WARRANTY  
11.BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM,  
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE  
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF  
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS  
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE  
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  
12.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT  
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS  
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM  
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES  
154  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER  
PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH  
DAMAGES.  
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs  
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to  
achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.  
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to  
most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a  
pointer to where the full notice is found.  
<one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.>  
Copyright © <year> <name of author>  
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public  
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later  
version.  
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the  
implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public  
License for more details.  
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the  
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.  
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.  
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:  
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright © year name of author  
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and  
you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.  
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public  
License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could  
even be mouse-clicks or menu items - whatever suits your program.  
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright  
disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:  
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program ‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at  
compilers) written by James Hacker.  
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989  
Ty Coon, President of Vice  
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your  
program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with  
the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.  
[GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE]  
Version 2.1, February 1999  
Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.  
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA  
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not  
allowed.  
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public  
License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]  
155  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
Preamble  
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the  
GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software - to  
make sure the software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some  
specially designated software packages - typically libraries - of the Free Software Foundation and other authors  
who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the  
ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations  
below.  
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are  
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service  
if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use  
pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.  
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you  
to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of  
the library or if you modify it.  
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the  
rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other  
code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with  
the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they  
know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you  
this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.  
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the  
library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the  
original version, so that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced  
by others.  
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that  
a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent  
holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with  
the full freedom of use specified in this license.  
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This  
license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from  
the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those  
libraries into non-free programs.  
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two  
is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License  
therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public  
License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.  
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than  
the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over  
competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License  
for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.  
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain  
library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the  
library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case,  
there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.  
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to  
use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables  
many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU Linux operating system.  
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user  
of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a  
modified version of the Library.  
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the  
difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code  
derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.  
156  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION  
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the  
copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General  
Public License (also called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.  
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with  
application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.  
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms.  
A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to  
say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated  
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term  
“modification”.)  
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library,  
complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface  
definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.  
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its  
scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is  
covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a  
tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the  
Library does.  
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive it, in any  
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright  
notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of  
any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.  
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty  
protection in exchange for a fee.  
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library,  
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also  
meet all of these conditions:  
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.  
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the  
date of any change.  
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this  
License.  
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application  
program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you  
must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or  
table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For  
example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined  
independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function  
or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root  
function must still compute square roots.)  
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not  
derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in  
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as  
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the  
Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other  
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.  
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;  
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on  
the Library.  
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work  
based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under  
the scope of this License.  
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given  
copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the  
157  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of  
the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.)  
Do not make any other change in these notices.  
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public  
License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when  
you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.  
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or  
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete  
corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and  
2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.  
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering  
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the  
source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.  
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by  
being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a  
derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.  
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the  
Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable  
is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.  
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code  
for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is  
especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold  
for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.  
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros  
and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless  
of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library  
will still fall under Section 6.)  
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the  
terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are  
linked directly with the Library itself.  
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the  
Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your  
choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse  
engineering for debugging such modifications.  
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library  
and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution  
displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a  
reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:  
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library  
including whatever changes were used in the work  
(which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the  
Library, with the complete machine-readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source  
code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing  
the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the  
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)  
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1)  
uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying  
library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if  
the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work  
was made with.  
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials  
specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.  
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent  
access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.  
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a  
copy.  
158  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility  
programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to  
be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with  
the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,  
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.  
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that  
do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them  
and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.  
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with  
other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the  
separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted,  
and provided that you do these two things:  
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any  
other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.  
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library,  
and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.  
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under  
this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and  
will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or  
rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in  
full compliance.  
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you  
permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you  
do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the  
Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,  
distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.  
10.Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives  
a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms  
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted  
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.  
11.If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not  
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that  
contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you  
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent  
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license  
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly  
through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from  
distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular  
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply  
in other circumstances.  
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to  
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free  
software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made  
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent  
application of that system; it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software  
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.  
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this  
License.  
12.If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted  
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit  
geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or  
among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the  
body of this License.  
13.The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License  
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to  
address new problems or concerns.  
159  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License  
which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of  
that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a  
license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.  
14.If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are  
incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free  
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our  
decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and  
of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.  
NO WARRANTY  
15.BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO  
THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE  
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF  
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS  
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE  
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  
16.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT  
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED  
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING  
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY  
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN  
IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries  
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend  
making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution  
under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).  
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each  
source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright”  
line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.  
<one line to give the library’s name and a brief idea of what it does.>  
Copyright © <year> <name of author>  
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General  
Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option)  
any later version.  
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the  
implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General  
Public License for more details.  
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to  
the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA  
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.  
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright  
disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:  
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by  
James Random Hacker.  
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990  
Ty Coon, President of Vice  
That’s all there is to it!  
160  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
[Linux Source Notice]  
The software programs used on this product include the Linux operating system. The Linux contains software  
licensed for use based on the terms of a GNU General Public License. The machine readable copy of the  
corresponding source code is available for the cost of distribution.  
For more information or to obtain a copy, contact your local Pioneer Customer Service center.  
Details of the GNU General Public License can be found at the GNU website (http://www.gnu.org).  
161  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
08  
8.4 Glossary  
HDMI  
The High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) is a digital data transmission standard for consumer  
electronics/home appliances. HDMI connects digital audio/video sources to a compatible digital audio and/or  
video device, such as a flat panel TV. HDMI also allows digitally transmitted audio and control signals on a single  
cable for multi-channel digital audio sources.  
PCM  
The Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) is a method for converting analog audio signals to digital. PCM is used in  
music CDs.  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital is an encoding technology for audio signal compressions. Dolby Digital supports high-quality, high-  
compression, multi-channel audio formats. The 5.1-channel surround format is utilized in digital broadcasts.  
High-Definition Broadcast  
A digital television broadcasting system with greater resolution than traditional television systems. As compared  
with the existing terrestrial analog broadcasting system capable of producing an image composed of 525 lines of  
resolution, the digital high-definition broadcasting system features 750 or 1125 lines, thus providing higher  
definition and quality image.  
Interlaced Scanning  
In NTSC television or video image display, interlaced scanning first redraws every second line of the image field  
(262.5 lines) per each image refresh in 1/60 of a second, then the remaining lines with a second refresh in 1/60  
of a second for a complete frame of an image (525 lines). Effective scanning lines are expressed as “480i” and  
“1080i” (“i” stands for “interlaced”).  
Progressive Scanning  
The progressive scanning redraws an image frame (all of its lines) in order per each image refresh. Compared to  
interlaced scanning, progressive scanning produces less flicker, making it suitable for displaying text and still  
images. Effective scanning lines are expressed as “480p” and “720p” (“p” stands for “progressive”).  
(Home Media Gallery)  
Default Gateway  
Default gateway is a node on a computer network that serves as an access point to another network. A default  
gateway (such as a computer and router) is used to forward all traffic that is not addressed to a station within the  
local subnet.  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server  
Provides a mechanism to allocate IP addresses to client hosts. In most cases, a broadband router serves as a  
DHCP server in a home network.  
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance)  
The DLNA authorized logo makes it easy for consumers to recognize products that meet the new standard for  
home network PCs and other digital devices, as set down in the DLNA Guidelines for interoperability. This allows  
music, video, etc. to be enjoyed from various devices over a home network. This unit is compatible with music,  
photo and video content, and is based on the DLNA Home Networked Device Interoperability Guidelines -  
expanded: October 2006 (v1.5). This unit can be used to playback music, photos and video stored on a DLNA-  
compatible server connected through a LAN cable.  
Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is dedicated to the simplified sharing of digital content, such as digital  
music, photos and video among networked consumer electronics (CE) and PCs. By establishing a platform of  
interoperability based on open industry standards, DLNA delivers technical design guidelines that companies  
can use to develop digital home products that share content through wired or wireless networks in the home.  
DNS (Domain Name Service) Server  
DNS Server is a server that determines the name of network-computer within the Internet. The server functions  
to exchange IP address to the hostname, hostname to the IP address.  
Ethernet  
A frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). The flat panel TV supports  
100BASE-TX.  
162  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
08  
IP (Internet Protocol) Address  
A unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing  
the Internet Protocol standard, such as “192.168.1.xxx”. No duplicate numbers are allowed within the network.  
LAN Cable  
A cable that has an eight-pin modular plug on each end and is different from a telephone plug which has four  
pins. A straight cable is used when connecting the flat panel TV to a home network via a hub. A cross-over cable  
is used when connecting directly to a PC. Use category 5 (CAT-5) LAN cables.  
MAC (Media Access Control) Address  
An address attached to the port of any network device with an IP address. The MAC address is expressed as  
“00:e0:36:01:23:xx” and cannot be changed.  
Mass Storage Class Devices  
The standard provides an interface to a variety of storage devices, such as USB flash drive and digital cameras.  
PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol)  
A protocol that allows the transfer of images and manipulation of digital cameras through USB connection. Most  
recent digital cameras and other devices support PTP allowing the transfer of images through direct connections.  
Subnet Mask  
Used to determine the etwork when IP addresses are broken into several parts. It is expressed as “255.255.255.0”.  
In most cases, the Subnet mask is automatically assigned by the DHCP server.  
UPnP (Universal Plug and Play)  
Architecture for pervasive peer-to-peer network connectivity of devices of all form factors. It is designed to bring  
easy-to-use, flexible, standard based connectivity to ad-hoc or unmanaged networks whether in the home, in a  
small business, public spaces, or attached to the Internet.  
USB (Universal Serial Bus)  
USB provides a serial bus standard for connecting devices, usually to computers such as PCs. The flat panel TV  
supports the Mass Storage Class and PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol) devices.  
Windows Media Connect  
Microsoft Windows Media Connect is a new technology to distribute music, photos and video stored on a PC with  
Windows XP installed to a stereo system of TV. Using this technology you can playback files stored on the PC from  
various devices wherever you like in your home.  
Windows Media DRM  
Windows Media DRM is copyright protection technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. It enables content  
providers to distribute over the Internet music, video and other digital media content in a protected, encrypted file  
format.  
Windows Media Player  
A free digital media player application provided by Microsoft that is used for playing audio, video and images on  
PCs.  
Windows Media Player 11  
The functionality of Windows Media Connect has been integrated into this version of Windows Media Player. After  
installing Windows Media Player 11 Windows Media Connect will not function. See Microsoft’s website for  
details.  
163  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.5 Index  
08  
Language ..............................................................37, 38, 73, 74, 86  
M
MOVIE ...............................................................................12, 47, 57  
Orbiter ...................................................................................56, 133  
Picture-in-picture .............................................................12, 13, 69  
Sound ..........................................................................45, 49, 57, 72  
STANDARD .............................................................................12, 58  
System Setup ................................................................................37  
Numerics  
100BASE-TX ..........................................................................95, 162  
A
Auto Size ...........................................................................55, 59, 62  
B
C
Canadian English Ratings ...........................................................52  
Channel .............................................................................38, 41, 44  
Clock .....................................................................................38, 122  
D
E
F
G
Game Control Pref .................................................................59, 64  
H
HDMI Control ...................................................................84, 86, 88  
HDMI Input .....................................................................84, 85, 124  
HDMI terminal ..........................................................30, 84, 86, 126  
Home Media Gallery ....................................................................93  
HOME MENU .........................................................................12, 37  
I
Text Optimization .........................................................................63  
Time Zone .....................................................................................38  
Tint ...........................................................................................58, 61  
Treble .............................................................................................49  
TV Parental Guidelines ....................................................51, 52, 53  
TV/DTV ...............................................................................13, 29, 35  
U
InfoBanner ....................................................................................71  
Input ........................................................................................12, 43  
Installation ......................................................................14, 38, 131  
IR REPEATER OUT .......................................................................92  
L
Unavailable Ratings .....................................................................52  
USER .......................................................................................12, 58  
V
VOLUME ..................................................................................44, 75  
Label ..............................................................................................43  
164  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
08  
8.6 Trademarks, Licenses, & Patent Information  
Trademarks  
is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc.  
WOW HD technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing  
LLC.  
®
This product includes FontAvenue fonts licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC  
Corporation.  
DDC is a registered trademark of Video Electronics Standards Association.  
This software is based in part on the work of the independent JPEG Group.  
The names of the companies or institutions are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies or  
institutions.  
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance.  
License  
Content owners use Windows Media digital rights management technology (WMDRM) to protect their intellectual property,  
including copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software to access WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails  
to protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy  
protected content. Revocation does not affect unprotected content. When you download licenses for protected content, you  
agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require you to upgrade WMDRM to  
access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade.  
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of  
this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.  
The DLNA logo is permitted to the product that has obtained a DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) certificate.  
Disclaimer Notice  
Pioneer provides information to help in setting up a network and connecting the flat panel TV to the network, but you are solely  
responsible for proper network setup and the connection. Pioneer bears no responsibility whatsoever for any damage arising  
from the network setup and the connection you made.  
When downloading software updates from the Pioneer website and performing updating procedures, make sure that your  
connections from the network to your USB flash drive, and from your USB flash drive to the flat panel TV are uninterrupted.  
Pioneer bears no responsibility for any failures or damage resulting from connection problems.  
Content may not work properly depending on the USB device used. Pioneer assumes no responsibility whatsoever for any  
failures or damage resulting from the USB device used by the user.  
165  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Should this product require service in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Independent Service Company, or if you wish to  
purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, service manuals, or accessories, please call the number shown below.  
8 0 0 – 4 2 1 – 1 6 2 5  
Please do not ship your product to Pioneer without first calling the Customer Support Division at the above listed number for assistance.  
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc.  
Customer Support Division  
P.O. BOX 1760, Long Beach,  
CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.  
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.  
Should this product require service in Canada, please contact a Pioneer Canadian Authorized Dealer to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Service  
Company in Canada.  
Alternatively, please contact the Customer Satisfaction Department at the following address:  
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.  
Customer Satisfaction Department  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2  
1-877-283-5901  
905-479-4411  
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.  
Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous adresser à un distributeur autorisé Pioneer du Canada pour obtenir le nom du Centre de Service  
Autorisé Pioneer le plus près de chez-vous. Vous pouvez aussi contacter le Service à la clientèle de Pioneer:  
Pioneer Électroniques du Canada, Inc.  
Service Clientèle  
300, Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2  
1-877-283-5901  
905-479-4411  
Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez vous reporter au feuillet sur la garantie restreinte qui accompagne le produit.  
S018_B_EF  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Register Your Product on  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com (US)  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada)  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270  
K002_B_En  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2008 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
<ARB1579-B>  
Printed in China  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Peavey Musical Instrument Amplifier 12T User Manual
Philips Computer Monitor 107P50 User Manual
Philips Computer Monitor M1900 User Manual
Philips Electric Toothbrush HX5351 User Manual
Philips Network Card TDA8767 User Manual
Philips Portable DVD Player PET706 00 User Manual
Philips TV Cables SWA2425W User Manual
Philips TV DVD Combo 14PT6107G User Manual
Polaroid Flat Panel Television FLA 3232B User Manual
Poulan Trimmer TE450 User Manual